BC-5300Vet Auto Hematology Analyzer
Service Manual
© 2009-2010 Shenzhen Mindray Bio-medical Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights Reserved. For this Operator’s Manual, the issued Date is 2010-12.
Intellectual Property Statement SHENZHEN MINDRAY BIO-MEDICAL ELECTRONICS CO., LTD. (hereinafter called Mindray) owns the intellectual property rights to this Mindray product and this manual. This manual may refer to information protected by copyright or patents and does not convey any license under the patent rights or copyright of Mindray, or of others. Mindray intends to maintain the contents of this manual as confidential information. Disclosure of the information in this manual in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Mindray is strictly forbidden. Release, amendment, reproduction, distribution, rental, adaptation, translation or any other derivative work of this manual in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Mindray is strictly forbidden.
,
,
are the trademarks, registered or otherwise, of Mindray in
China and other countries. All other trademarks that appear in this manual are used only for informational or editorial purposes. They are the property of their respective owners.
Responsibility on the Manufacturer Party Contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice. All information contained in this manual is believed to be correct. Mindray shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this manual. Mindray is responsible for the effects on safety, reliability and performance of this product, only if:
all installation operations, expansions, changes, modifications and repairs of this
product are conducted by Mindray authorized personnel;
the electrical installation of the relevant room complies with the applicable national
and local requirements; and
the product is used in accordance with the instructions for use.
I
It is important for the hospital or organization that employs this equipment to carry out a reasonable service/maintenance plan. Neglect of this may result in machine breakdown or injury of human health.
Be sure to operate the analyzer under the situation specified in this manual; otherwise, the analyzer will not work normally and the analysis results will be unreliable, which would damage the analyzer components and cause personal injury.
This equipment must be operated by skilled/trained clinical professionals.
II
Warranty THIS WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Exemptions Mindray's obligation or liability under this warranty does not include any transportation or other charges or liability for direct, indirect or consequential damages or delay resulting from the improper use or application of the product or the use of parts or accessories not approved by Mindray or repairs by people other than Mindray authorized personnel. This warranty shall not extend to:
Malfunction or damage caused by improper use or man-made failure.
Malfunction or damage caused by unstable or out-of-range power input.
Malfunction or damage caused by force majeure such as fire and earthquake.
Malfunction or damage caused by improper operation or repair by unqualified or
unauthorized service people.
Malfunction of the instrument or part whose serial number is not legible enough.
Others not caused by instrument or part itself.
III
Company Contact Manufacturer: E-mail Address:
Shenzhen Mindray Bio-Medical Electronics Co., Ltd.
[email protected]
Tel:
+86 755 26582479 26582888
Fax:
+86 755 26582934 26582500
EC-Representative: Address:
Shanghai International Holding Corp. GmbH(Europe) Eiffestraβe 80, Hamburg 20537, Germany
Tel:
0049-40-2513175
Fax:
0049-40-255726
IV
Table of Contents 1
Using This Manual............................................................................................... 1-1 1.1
Introduction............................................................................................................ 1-1
1.2
Who Should Read This Manual............................................................................. 1-2
1.3
How to Find Information ........................................................................................ 1-3
1.4
Conventions Used in This Manual......................................................................... 1-4
1.5
Symbols ................................................................................................................. 1-5
2
System Structure................................................................................................. 2-1 2.1
Introduction............................................................................................................ 2-1
2.2
Fluidic System ....................................................................................................... 2-2
2.3
Hardware System .................................................................................................. 2-2
2.4
Main Unit................................................................................................................ 2-2
2.5
Software structure ................................................................................................. 2-9 2.5.1 Menu structure ......................................................................................... 2-9 2.5.2 Passwords.............................................................................................. 2-18
3
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade................................................. 3-1 3.1
Preparations .......................................................................................................... 3-1 3.1.1 Purpose .................................................................................................... 3-1 3.1.2 Tools ......................................................................................................... 3-1 3.1.3 Accessories .............................................................................................. 3-1
3.2
Installation Requirements ...................................................................................... 3-2 3.2.1 Space Requirements ................................................................................ 3-2 3.2.2 Power Requirements................................................................................ 3-2 3.2.3 Environment Requirements...................................................................... 3-2 3.2.4 PC Configuration Requirements .............................................................. 3-3
3.3
Package Checking and Unpacking ....................................................................... 3-7 3.3.1 Checks before unpacking......................................................................... 3-7 3.3.2 Unpacking Main Unit ................................................................................ 3-7 3.3.3 Checking packing list................................................................................ 3-9
3.4
Removal and Installation ..................................................................................... 3-10
3.5
Connections......................................................................................................... 3-17
3.6
Start-up ................................................................................................................ 3-21 3.6.1 Inspection before Startup ....................................................................... 3-21
3.7
Setup and Adjustment ......................................................................................... 3-30
3.8
Testing Other Functions....................................................................................... 3-35
3.9
Confirming Gain................................................................................................... 3-36
3.10 Calibration and Performance Test ....................................................................... 3-41 3.11 Software upgrade ................................................................................................ 3-50 4
Fluidic System ..................................................................................................... 4-1 4.1
Introduction of Fluidic Parts ................................................................................... 4-1 4.1.1 Sample probe ........................................................................................... 4-1 4.1.2 Probe Wipe............................................................................................... 4-1 1
Table of Contents 4.1.3 4.1.4 4.1.5 4.1.6 4.1.7 4.1.8
Pumps ...................................................................................................... 4-1 Syringes ................................................................................................... 4-1 Valves ....................................................................................................... 4-1 Baths ........................................................................................................ 4-2 Volumetric tube......................................................................................... 4-2 Filters........................................................................................................ 4-2
4.2
Fluidic System ....................................................................................................... 4-3 4.2.1 Reagent volume required......................................................................... 4-3 4.2.2 Fluidic System Drawing............................................................................ 4-5 4.2.3 WBC Measurement Procedures .............................................................. 4-6 4.2.4 RBC/PLT Measurement Procedures........................................................ 4-7 4.2.5 HGB Measurement Procedures ............................................................... 4-7
4.3
Sequence of Whole Blood CBC+DIFF Measurement ........................................... 4-8 4.3.1 Sampling and dispensing procedures ...................................................... 4-8 4.3.2 DIFF Channel ......................................................................................... 4-10 4.3.3 WBC/HGB Channel................................................................................ 4-12 4.3.4 RBC/PLT Channel .................................................................................. 4-15 4.3.5 Sequence of Predilute Mode CBC+DIFF Measurement........................ 4-17 4.3.6 Sequence of CBC Measurement ........................................................... 4-17
5
Hardware System ................................................................................................ 5-1 5.1
Mother board ......................................................................................................... 5-3 5.1.1 Introduction............................................................................................... 5-3 5.1.2 Board Composition................................................................................... 5-3 5.1.3 Adjustment and Test Points.................................................................... 5-26 5.1.4 Removal ................................................................................................. 5-27 5.1.5 Troubleshooting...................................................................................... 5-29
5.2
Data board ........................................................................................................... 5-31 5.2.1 Introduction............................................................................................. 5-31 5.2.2 Board composition.................................................................................. 5-31 5.2.3 Adjustment and Test Points.................................................................... 5-43 5.2.4 Disassembly and assembly method....................................................... 5-47 5.2.5 Troubleshooting...................................................................................... 5-48
5.3
Drive board .......................................................................................................... 5-56 5.3.1 Introduction............................................................................................. 5-56 5.3.2 Board composition.................................................................................. 5-56 5.3.3 Adjustment and Test Points.................................................................... 5-71 5.3.4 Disassembly and assembly method....................................................... 5-74 5.3.5 Troubleshooting...................................................................................... 5-76
5.4
Power board ........................................................................................................ 5-95 5.4.1 Introduction............................................................................................. 5-95 5.4.2 Board Composition................................................................................. 5-96 5.4.3 Adjustment and Test Points.................................................................. 5-101 5.4.4 Replacement and Connection.............................................................. 5-103 5.4.5 Troubleshooting.................................................................................... 5-106
5.5
Volumetric and pressure detecting board.......................................................... 5-108 5.5.1 Introduction........................................................................................... 5-108 5.5.2 Board Composition............................................................................... 5-108 5.5.3 Disassembly and assembly method......................................................5-111 5.5.4 Troubleshooting.................................................................................... 5-113
5.6
Liquid-level detecting board .............................................................................. 5-119 5.6.1 Introduction........................................................................................... 5-119 5.6.2 Board composition................................................................................ 5-119 5.6.3 Replacement and Connection.............................................................. 5-122 5.6.4 Troubleshooting.................................................................................... 5-124
5.7
Laser Control Board .......................................................................................... 5-126 2
Table of Contents 5.7.1 5.7.2 5.7.3 5.7.4 5.7.5
Introduction........................................................................................... 5-126 Board Composition............................................................................... 5-126 Adjustment and Test Points.................................................................. 5-129 Assembly and disassembly.................................................................. 5-130 Troubleshooting.................................................................................... 5-130
5.8
Pre-amplification board...................................................................................... 5-133 5.8.1 Introduction........................................................................................... 5-133 5.8.2 Board Composition............................................................................... 5-133 5.8.3 Adjustment and Test Points.................................................................. 5-137 5.8.4 Disassembly and assembly.................................................................. 5-137 5.8.5 Troubleshooting.................................................................................... 5-138
5.9
Indicator Board .................................................................................................. 5-140 5.9.1 Introduction........................................................................................... 5-140 5.9.2 Board Composition............................................................................... 5-140 5.9.3 Disassembly and assembly method..................................................... 5-141 5.9.4 Troubleshooting.................................................................................... 5-142
6
Maintenance......................................................................................................... 6-1 6.1
Maintenance Module and the Corresponding Settings ......................................... 6-1
6.2
General .................................................................................................................. 6-3
6.3
Disassembling the Panels ..................................................................................... 6-3 6.3.1 Removing the left door ............................................................................. 6-3 6.3.2 Removing the right door........................................................................... 6-4 6.3.3 Removing the top cover ........................................................................... 6-5 6.3.4 Removing the back panel......................................................................... 6-6 6.3.5 Removing the front cover assembly......................................................... 6-7
6.4
Replacing the Valves, Pumps and Syringes.......................................................... 6-9 6.4.1 Replacing the valve ................................................................................ 6-11 6.4.2 Replacing the Pressure Chamber .......................................................... 6-14 6.4.3 Replacing the Vacuum Chamber ........................................................... 6-15 6.4.4 Replacing the Syringe Assembly............................................................ 6-17 6.4.5 Replacing the Waste Pump.................................................................... 6-22
6.5
Replacing the Bath/Aperture Assembly............................................................... 6-24
6.6
Replacing the Sampling Module and Adjusting Position ..................................... 6-27 6.6.1 Replacing the Sample Probe and Wipe ................................................. 6-27 6.6.2 Replacing the Optical Sensor................................................................. 6-29 6.6.3 Removing the Sampling Module ............................................................ 6-31 6.6.4 Adjusting sample probe position ............................................................ 6-34
6.7
Maintaining and Replacing the DIFF Reaction Bath ........................................... 6-35
7
Optical System..................................................................................................... 7-1 7.1
Optical System Adjustment and Troubleshooting.................................................. 7-1
7.2
Removing and Installing Optical System Assemblies............................................ 7-2 7.2.1 Laser driver board .................................................................................... 7-2 7.2.2 Front light assembly ................................................................................. 7-3 7.2.3 Flow cell assembly ................................................................................... 7-4 7.2.4 Rear light collimator assembly ................................................................. 7-6 7.2.5 Beam splitter assembly ............................................................................ 7-6 7.2.6 Rear light collector assembly ................................................................... 7-7 7.2.7 Rear light detector assembly.................................................................... 7-9
7.3
Adjustment........................................................................................................... 7-11 7.3.1 Coarse adjustment ................................................................................. 7-11 7.3.2 Preparation before fine tuning................................................................ 7-17 7.3.3 Fine tuning.............................................................................................. 7-19 3
Table of Contents 7.3.4 7.4
8
Gain setup .............................................................................................. 7-23
Troubleshooting ................................................................................................... 7-25 7.4.1 Laser spot-deviation ............................................................................... 7-25 7.4.2 Flow cell clog.......................................................................................... 7-25 7.4.3 Dirty flow cell .......................................................................................... 7-26 Troubleshooting .................................................................................................. 8-1
8.1
Error code and information .................................................................................... 8-1
8.2
Errors indicated by error messages ...................................................................... 8-7 8.2.1 Pressure errors......................................................................................... 8-7 8.2.2 Reagent errors ......................................................................................... 8-7 8.2.3 Hardware errors ....................................................................................... 8-8 8.2.4 Measurement errors................................................................................. 8-8 8.2.5 Temperature errors................................................................................. 8-10
9
Appendixes ......................................................................................................... A-1 A.
Accessories ...........................................................................................................A-1
B.
List of Wearing Parts .............................................................................................B-1
C.
Fluidic diagram ..................................................................................................... C-1
D.
Pump and Valve Function Table ........................................................................... D-1
E.
Tubing....................................................................................................................E-1
F.
Error Module and the Classified Errors ................................................................. F-1
G.
Maintenance Module and the Corresponding Settings ........................................ G-1
H.
Method to identify cross network cable and direct-connected network cable ...... H-1
4
1
Using This Manual
1.1 Introduction The chapter explains how to use the hematology analyzer service manual. This manual provides the reference information and procedures. Before servicing hematology analyzer, read and understand the manual carefully for servicing the equipment properly and for your safety. This manual is to be used in conjunction with the operator’s manual of hematology analyzer. It does not contain information and procedures already covered in the operator’s manual.
Be sure to operate and service the analyzer strictly as instructed in this manual and the operator’s manual.
1-1
Using This Manual
1.2 Who Should Read This Manual To use this service manual effectively, the reader should posses: A thorough understanding of
Basic electronic and fluidics principles and devices
Reagent systems
Quality control
Troubleshooting concepts
The ability to
Use basic mechanical tools and understand related terminology
Use a digital voltmeter (DVM) and an oscilloscope
Read fluidics schematics and understand related terminology
Read electronic schematics and understand related terminology
1-2
Using This Manual
1.3 How to Find Information This service manual comprises 8 chapters and 5 appendices. Refer to the table below to find the information you need. If you want to …
See …
learn about the system structure and the basic
Chapter 2 System Structure
principle of the hematology analyzer learn about the installation requirements and how to
Chapter
upgrade the hematology analyzer software
Software Upgrade
learn about the fluidic system
Chapter 4 Fluidic System
learn about the hardware system
Chapter 5 Hardware System
learn about how to maintain
Chapter 6 Maintenance
learn about the optical system
Chapter 7 Optical System
learn about how to troubleshoot the common errors
Chapter 8 Troubleshooting
learn about the main spare parts
Appendix A List of Spare Parts
learn about the main wearing parts
Appendix B List of Wearing Parts
learn about the schematic diagram of the fluidic
Appendix C Fluidic Diagram
3
System
Installation
and
system learn about the function of each valve and pump
Appendix D Pump and Valve Function Table
learn about the tubing connection
Appendix E Tubing
learn about the error module and the classified errors
Appendix F Error Module and the Classified Errors
learn about the maintenance module and the
Appendix G Maintenance Module and
corresponding settings
the Corresponding Settings
1-3
Using This Manual
1.4 Conventions Used in This Manual This manual uses certain typographical conventions to clarify meaning in the text:
all capital letters enclosed in [ ] indicate a key name (either on the pop-up keyboard or the external keyboard), such as [ENTER].
bold letters included in “ ” indicate text you can find on the screen, such as “Clean”.
bold letters indicate chapter titles, such as Chapter 1 Using This Manual.
All illustrations in this manual are provided as examples only. They may not necessarily reflect your analyzer setup or data displayed.
1-4
Using This Manual
1.5 Symbols You will find the following symbols in this manual: When you see…
Then… Read the statement below the symbol. The statement is alerting you to an operating hazard that can cause personnel injury. Read the statement below the symbol. The statement is alerting you to a possibility of analyzer damage or unreliable analysis results. Read the statement below the symbol. The statement is alerting you to information that requires your attention. Read the statement below the symbol. The statement is alerting you to a potentially biohazardous condition.
You may find the following symbols on the analyzer, reagents, controls or calibrators. When you see…
It means… CAUTION, CONSULT ACCOMPANYING DOCUMENTS.
BIOLOGICAL RISK
HIGH VOLTAGE
WARNING, LASER BEAM
WARNING, HOT SURFACE
PROTECTIVE EARTH (GROUND)
1-5
Using This Manual
EARTH (GROUND)
ALTERNATING CURRENT
BATCH CODE
USE BY
SERIAL NUMBER
CATALOG NUMBER (FOR CONTROLS)
DATE OF MANUFACTURE
MANUFACTURER
TEMPERATURE LIMITATION
CONSULT INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE
IRRITATING SUBSTANCE THE FOLLOWING DEFINITION OF THE WEEE LABEL APPLIES TO EU MEMBER STATES ONLY: THE USE OF THIS SYMBOL INDICATES THAT THIS PRODUCT SHOULD NOT BE TREATED AS HOUSEHOLD WASTE. BY ENSURING THAT THIS PRODUCT IS DISPOSED OF CORRECTLY, YOU WILL HELP PREVENT
1-6
Using This Manual BRINGING POTENTIAL NEGATIVE CONSEQUENCES TO THE ENVIRONMENT AND HUMAN HEALTH. FOR MORE DETAILED INFORMATION WITH REGARD TO RETURNING AND RECYCLING THIS PRODUCT, PLEASE CONSULT THE DISTRIBUTOR FROM WHOM YOU PURCHASED THE PRODUCT. Be sure to observe the following precautions for the safety of patients, operators and yours when you are servicing the analyzer.
1-7
Using This Manual
It is important for the laboratory that employs this equipment to carry out a reasonable service/maintenance plan. Neglect of this may result in machine breakdown or injury of human health.
Never use combustible gas (e.g. anesthetic) or combustible liquid (e.g. ethanol) around the analyzer. Otherwise, the risk of explosion may exist.
Contacting exposed electronic components while the equipment is attached to power can cause personal injury from electric shock or damage to electronic components. Power down before removing covers to access electronic components.
Connect the analyzer to a socket having sole fuse and protective switch. Do not use the same fuse and protective switch with other equipment (e.g. life supporting equipment). Otherwise, the equipment failure, over current or impulse current that occurs at the startup moment may lead to tripping.
To prevent personal injury during the maintenance, keep your clothes, hairs and hands from the moving parts, such as sample probe.
Possible mechanical movement of the warned position may lead to personal injury during the normal operation, removal and maintenance.
Be sure to dispose of reagents, waste, samples, consumables, etc. according to government regulations.
The reagents are irritating to eyes, skin and diaphragm. Wear proper personal protective equipment (e.g. gloves, lab coat, etc.) and follow safe laboratory procedures when handling them in the laboratory.
If the reagents accidentally spill on your skin, wash them off with plenty of water and if necessary, go see a doctor; if the reagents accidentally spill into your eyes, wash them off with plenty of water and immediately go see a doctor.
1-8
Using This Manual
Improper maintenance may damage the analyzer. Maintain the analyzer strictly as instructed by the service manual and inspect the analyzer carefully after the maintenance.
For problems not mentioned in the service manual, contact Mindray customer service department for maintenance advice.
To prevent personal injury or damage to equipment components, remove metal jewelry before maintaining or servicing electronic components of the equipment.
Electrostatic discharge may damage electronic components. If there is a possibility of ESD damage with a procedure, then do that procedure at an ESD workstation, or wear an antistatic wrist strap.
This equipment must be operated by skilled/trained professionals.
Samples, controls, calibrators and waste are potentially infectious. Wear proper personal protective equipment (e.g. gloves, lab coat, etc.) and follow safe laboratory procedures when handling them in the laboratory.
All the analyzer components and surfaces are potentially infectious.
Take proper protective measures for operation or maintenance.
The sample probe tip is sharp and may contain biohazardous materials. Exercise caution to avoid contact with the probe when working around it.
1-9
2
System Structure
2.1 Introduction
Hardware
Hardware collects signals, controls and drives moving parts, and processes and displays information. It mainly consists of the mother board, drive board, data board, power board, laser control board, FS pre-amplification board, SS pre-amplification board, volumetric board, indicator board and liquid-level detecting board.
Interface
The system mainly consists of two parts, the main unit (analyzer) and the external computer, which are connected through the network port. Other connections are realized through the interfaces of the external computer.
Software operating environment
The system software consists of the main unit software and the operation software. The main unit software is operated on the data board inner the analyzer; the operation software is operated under the WINDOWS platform of the external computer. The main unit software analyzes the sequence, collects and identifies data. The operation software displays and prints the results and stores them into the database, and realizes the interaction of the functions including count, QC, calibration, maintenance, data management and communication, etc.
Fluidic System
The fluidic system indicates the tubing where reagents, samples and air pass in the analyzer. The fluidic system controls the correlatively jointed fluidic parts in a set sequence by the software and driving of the hardware to control the distribution and direction of the medium.
2-1
System Structure
2.2 Fluidic System Refer to Chapter 4 Fluidic System of this manual
2.3 Hardware System Refer to Chapter 5 Hardware System of this manual
2.4 Main Unit
Figure2-1 Front of the main unit
1---Power Indicator
2---Sample Probe
3---Aspirate Key
2-2
System Structure
Figure2-2 Back of the main unit
1 --- V-53D Diluent sensor connector
2 --- V-53D Diluent inlet
3 --- V-53 cleanser inlet
4 --- V-53LH Lyse inlet
5 --- V-53LEO(Ⅱ)Lyse inlet
6 --- V-53LEO(Ⅰ)Lyse Inlet
7 --- Waste outlet
8 --- Waste sensor connector
9 --- AC input
10 --- Network interface
2-3
System Structure
Figure2-3 Left side of the main unit
1--- Door Lock
2---Sample Probe
3--- Power switch
2-4
System Structure
Figure2-4 Right side of the main unit
1---Door Lock
2---Sample Probe
2-5
System Structure
Figure2-5 Front of the main unit (front cover removed) 1 --- Sampling Module
2 --- Aspirate Key
3 --- Sampling syringe assembly
4 --- Sample injection syringe assembly
5 --- Sheath fluid syringe assembly
6 --- Relieve valve assembly
7--- Fluidic valve
2-6
System Structure
Figure2-6 Left side of the main unit (left door removed)
1 --- Front door assembly
2 --- Diluent syringe assembly
3 --- Lyse syringe assembly
4 --- Pressure chamber assembly
5 --- Air pumps
6 --- Left door
7 --- liquid level detection unit
8 --- Valve assembly (2)
9 --- Valve assembly (1)
10 --- Power switch
11 --- Drive board
12 --- Data board
13 --- Mother board
14 --- Top cover
2-7
System Structure
Figure2-7 Right side of the main unit (right door removed)
1 --- Optical system
2 --- Fluidic valves
3 --- Isolation chamber
4 --- Sampling assembly
5 --- Volumetric unit
6 --- Fluidic valves
7 --- Vacuum chamber assembly
8 --- Right door
9 --- Waste pump assembly
10 --- Valve assembly (3)
11 --- Bath assembly
12 --- WBC reaction bath assembly
13 --- Pinch valve
2-8
System Structure
2.5 Software structure The software system consists of the main unit software which operates on the data board inner the analyzer and the operation software which operates under the WINDOWS platform of the external computer. The main unit software analyzes sequence, collects data and calculates the parameters. The operation software realizes the interaction of the functions including count, QC, calibration, maintenance, data management and parameter setup, etc.
2.5.1 Menu structure 1. Shortcut button area When switching to any screen, a guidance bar will always be displayed on the left of the screen containing 8 frequently used shortcut buttons. Click them to perform the corresponding operations. The menu structure of the shortcut buttons is shown in Figure2-8.
Figure2-8 Menu structure of the shortcut button area 2. Review screen The Review menu has four submenus: Count, Table, Data Export and Compare. The “Table” review includes the function of auto-backup, which will be performed automatically by the software when the condition of backup is fulfilled. The menu structures of each screen of the “Review” screen are shown below.
Count
The menu structure of the Count screen is shown in Figure2-9.
2-9
System Structure
Figure2-9 Menu structure of the Count screen
Table
The menu structure of the table review screen is shown in Figure2-10.
Figure2-10 Menu structure of the table review screen 2-10
System Structure 3. QC screen The menu structure of the QC program is shown in Figure2-11. QC
Settings
Save Set Limits Have Preset Values Print
Run
Start QC Run Print Pos./Total Delete
Graph
New Vial Data Compare Display Order Calculate Preset Values Save Preset Values Outliers Print Pos./Total Table
Delete Print Communication Data Backup Data Export History Pos./Total
Figure2-11 Menu structure of the QC program
4. Service The “Service” screen contains screens of “Maintenance”, “Status”, “Self-test”, “Debug”, “Log”, “Counter” and “Version and Config. Information”. The menu structures of these screens are shown below.
2-11
System Structure
“Maintenance” screen
The menu structure of the “Maintenance” screen is shown in Figure2-12. Maintenance
Replace Reagent
Diluent LEO(I) Lyse LEO(II) Lyse LH Lyse Cleanser All Reagents
Clean
WBC Bath RBC Bath DIFF Bath Flow Cell Sample Probe
Maintain
Unclog Zap Apertures Flush Apertures Probe Cleanser Soak Cleanser Soak Soak DIFF Bath Soak WBC Bath Soak RBC Bath Empty WBC Bath Empty RBC Bath Empty DIFF Bath
Maintain the whole device
Fluidics Initialization Clean Fluidics Empty Fluidics Prepare to Ship
Figure2-12 Menu structure of the “Maintenance” screen
“Status” screen
The menu structure of the “Status” screen is shown in Figure2-13.
2-12
System Structure
Figure2-13 Menu structure of the “Status” screen
“Self-test” screen
The menu structure of the “Self-test” screen is shown in Figure2-14.
2-13
System Structure
Self-test
Motor
Diluent Syringe Motor Lyse Syringe Motor Sample Injection Syringe Motor Sheath Fluid Syringe Motor Sampling Syringe Motor Sample Probe Horizontal Motor Sample Probe Vertical Motor Print
Valve
Valve 1-15 Valve 21-39 All Valves Print
Others
WBC Volumetric Tube Filter RBC Volumetric Tube Filter WBC Aperture Voltage RBC Aperture Voltage Count Time Print
Figure2-14 Menu structure of the “Self-test” screen
“Debug” screen
The menu structure of the “Debug” screen is shown in Figure2-15.
2-14
System Structure
Debug
DIFF Bath Sample Probe
Start Forward Backward Up Down Ok
Figure2-15 Menu structure of the “Debug” screen
“Counter” screen
The menu structure of the “Counter” screen is shown in Figure2-16.
Figure2-16 Menu structure of the “Counter” screen
“Log” screen The menu structure of the “Log” screen is shown in Figure2-17
2-15
System Structure
Figure2-17 Menu structure of the “Log” screen
“Version and Config. Information” screen
The menu structure of the “Version and Config. Information” screen is shown in Figure2-18. Version and Config. Information
Export Print Close
Figure2-18 Menu structure of the “Version and Config. Information” screen
2-16
System Structure
5. “Setup” screen The “Setup” screen contains screens of “Gain”, “Data Format”, “Reagent”, “Auxiliary”, “Para. Unit”, “Ref. Range”, “Print”, “Auto Maintenance”, “User and Password”, “Lab Info”, “Advanced”, “Algorithmic parameter”, “Species Name” and “Diff Algorithm”. The menu structure of the “Setup” screen is shown in Figure2-19.
Setup
Date Format Reagent Auxiliary Para. Unit
New
Ref. Range
Edit
Print
Delete
Communication
Reset password
Gain
Change password
Auto-maintain
Close
User and Password Lab Info. Advanced
Maintain
Algorithmic Parameter Species Name Diff Algorithm
Figure2-19 Menu structure of the “Setup” screen
6. “Calibration” screen The menu structure of the “Calibration” screen is shown in Figure2-20.
Figure2-20 Menu structure of the “Calibration” screen
2-17
System Structure
7. Shutdown The menu structure of “SHUTDOWN” is shown in Figure2-21. SHUTDOWN
Sleep
Shutdown
Figure2-21 Menu structure of “SHUTDOWN”
8. Exit The menu structure of “EXIT” is shown in Figure2-22.
EXIT
Logout
Exit
Figure2-22 Menu structure of “EXIT”
2.5.2 Passwords The passwords are divided into three levels: common user, administrator and service engineer. An administrator is enabled all authorities of a common user, and a service engineer is enabled all authorities of an administrator. Tables below introduce the authorities enabled for each password level.
Table2-1 Authorities enabled for common user level Level Common User
Module Run Sample
Screen All
Authorities enabled
screens
except the “QC Run”
and
“Service” (Maintenance, Status, Self-test
and
Debug)
2-18
Users of three levels are all enabled the count authority.
System Structure Review
Count
Data/Count, Saving of DIFF, Print, Data Browse (the buttons of “Validate”, “Edit Result” and “Restore Result” are available, but when you click them, a message box will pop up for authority identification.) Saving of the “Microscopic Exam.” screen, Print and Data Browsing.
TABLE
Save, Print, Communication, Deselect, Search, Trend Graph, CV, arrow buttons above the “Pos./Total” control (the buttons of “Validate”, “Batch Validate”, “Edit Result” and “Restore Result” are available, but when you click them, a message box will pop up for authority identification.)
QC
Data Export
Data Export
Auto-backup
Auto-backup
L-J QC setup: switch the file No. to browse file information of different lot No.(but can not edit the QC settings) L-J QC count: QC Run, Data browse and Print L-J QC graph: New Vial, Data Compare, Display Order, Calculate Preset Values, Save Preset Values, Outliers, Print and Data browse function of the “Pos./Total” control. L-J QC table: Print, Communication, Data Backup, Data Export, History and Browse
Service
Maintenance
Replace Reagent, Clean, Maintain the whole device, Maintain
Status
Temperature&Pressure, Voltage&Current, Sensor&Photocoupler, check the status information
of
the
“Signal
Collection”
screen, export and print Current Screen Status and All Status Self-test
Self-test for motors, valves and other items and print the test results
Counter
Check the statistics data of the counter, print the data
Log
Check, print and modify logs including “Set Paras”, “Other Logs” and “All Logs”
Version
and
Check, export and print the information of
Config.
the “Version and Config. Information”
Information
screen 2-19
System Structure Setup
Date Format
Date Format
Reagent
Exp. Date and Lot No. Enable or disable the prompt box in the Predilute Mode Method of Entry for Sample ID
Auxiliary
Prefix of the Sample ID All the contents of the “Other” items of the “Auxiliary” screen Check the information of the “User list” screen, but New, Edit, Delete and Reset
User
and
Password
password are disabled. When log in as common user level, the password of the current login user can be modified.
Lab
Lab Information can be browsed but can
Information
not be edited.
Shortcut Code
Shortcut Shortcut Code
code
can
be
browsed
but
operation including New, Edit and Delete are disabled.
Calibration Help SHUTDOWN EXIT
Calibration
Browse and print the User Calibration
Factors
Factors
Help
Check the help information
SHUTDOWN EXIT
Perform
the
Sleep
and
Shutdown
procedures Log out and exit the system
Table2-2 Authorities enabled for administrator level Level Administrator
Module Run Sample
Screen All
Authorities enabled
screens
except the “QC Run”
and
“Service” (Maintenance, Status, Self-test
and
Debug) Review
Graph
Delete, Histogram Adjust., Validate, Edit Result and Restore Result
2-20
System Structure TABLE
Validate, Batch Validate, Edit Result and Delete
Data Export Auto-backup QC
L-J QC setup: Set the QC files which have not obtained the QC run results; set and save the Ref. range and Limits L-J QC count: all functions L-J QC graph: Delete L-J QC table: Delete
Service
Maintenance Status
Print sets
Self-test Counter Log Version
Check, print and modify the “Error Info.” log and
Config. Information “Authority” setting items of the “Auxiliary”
Setup
screen General Setup
Para.
Unit,
Ref.
Communication,
Gain,
Range,
Print,,
Automaintain,
check and set the parameters of each screen User
and
Password
New, Edit, delete user, reset the passwords of all users and change the own password
Lab
Check and edit the Lab Information
Information Species Name
Rename Species Name
Diff Algorithm
Setting Diff Algorithm of custom species
Shortcut Code
Shortcut Code
New, Edit and Delete the shortcut code
Calibration
Calibration
Browse, print, save and restore the User
Factors
Calibration Factors Calibration in the OV-WB mode Calibrate one or more parameters among
Calibrator
WBC, RBC, HGB, MCV and PLT. Help
Help
SHUTDOWN
SHUTDOWN
EXIT
EXIT
2-21
System Structure Table 2-3 Authorities enabled for service engineer level Level Service
Module Run Sample
Engineer
Screen All
Authorities enabled
screens
except the “QC Run”
and
“Service” (Maintenance, Status, Self-test
and
Debug) Review
Graph
Special Info.
TABLE
Optical
Data Export Auto-backup QC Service
Maintenance
Replace All Reagents Empty WBC Bath, Empty RBC Bath and Empty DIFF Bath at the “Maintenance” screen
Status
Export the Analyzer Information
Self-test Counter
Initialize the statistics of all items except the number times of samples being run; check the detail information of number of times of effective samples being run, QC and calibration.
Log
Export Log; check, print and modify the log of “RunSequence”
Debug Version
Debug and
Config. Information Edit FS, SS and SF values of the “Gain”
Setup General Setup
screen; set the value for “Auto prompt when
n
samples
were
“Automaintain” screen User
and
Password
2-22
run”
at
the
System Structure Lab Information Shortcut Code Advanced
Maintain
Species Name
Rename Species
Diff Algorithm
Setting Diff Algorithm of custom species
Calibration
Browse and print the User Calibration Factors; browse, print, save and restore
Calibration
the Factory Calibration Factors; Initialize
Factors
User Calibration Factors and Factory Calibration Factors 1. Factory calibrator calibration in the WB-CBC, WB-CBC+DIFF, PD-CBC and PD-CBC+DIFF mode.
Calibrator
2. Calibrate one or more parameters among WBC, RBC, HGB, MCV, PLT and MPV.
Help
Help
SHUTDOWN
SHUTDOWN
EXIT
EXIT
2-23
3
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade
3.1 Preparations 3.1.1 Purpose Install the instrument properly as per the procedures introduced in this chapter.
3.1.2 Tools
Blade or clipper
Clamp used for locating the volumetric tube
USB flash drive
Pipette (200μl)
Cross-headed screwdriver
The software copied in the U-drive must be the specified one for the analyzer of the specified model. Otherwise, you can not proceed to install.
3.1.3 Accessories
Plastic test tube
Pipette
7μm standard particle
Gloves
Tissues
Controls (high and normal level)
Do prepare the 7μm standard particles firstly to proceed with the later confirmation work of the optical gain.
3-1
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade
3.2 Installation Requirements 3.2.1 Space Requirements Check the site for proper space allocation. In addition to the space required for the main unit itself, arrange for:
at least100 cm on both left and right sides;
at least 50 cm behind ;
enough room on or below the countertop to accommodate the Reagent Kit.
3.2.2 Power Requirements 1. Make sure the main unit is properly grounded. Before turning on the main unit, make sure the input voltage meets the requirements. 2. Using pinboard may bring the electrical interference and the analysis results may be unreliable.
Please place the main unit near the electrical outlet to avoid using the
plug-board. 3. Please use the original electrical wire shipped with the main unit. Other electrical wire may damage the analyzer or cause unreliable analysis results. Voltage: A.C. 100V-240V Input power: ≤300 VA Frequency: 50/60 Hz
3.2.3 Environment Requirements The installation environment of main unit must meet the following requirements: 1. Optimal operating temperature: 15 ℃ - 30 ℃ 2. Optimal operating humidity: 30 % - 85 % 3. Atmospheric pressure: 70 kPa - 106 kPa 4. The environment should be as free as possible from dust, mechanical vibrations, loud noises, pollution and electrical interference. 5. It is advisable to evaluate the electromagnetic environment prior to the operation of this main unit. Make sure the electromagnetic interference is less than CLASS B. Do not use this main unit in close proximity to sources of strong electromagnetic radiation. 6. Do not place the main unit near brush-type motors, flickering fluorescent lights, and electrical contacts that regularly open and close. 7. Do not place the main unit on a slope. 8. The environment should have good ventilation. Do not place the main unit in direct sunlight or in front of a source of heat or drafts.
3-2
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade
Make sure the installation environment meets the above 8 requirements. Otherwise, the performance of the main unit might be affected.
3.2.4 PC Configuration Requirements 1. Startup the computer, then right-click “My Computer” and select “Properties” to enter the property screen shown in Figure 3-2. You can check the operation system and RAM of the computer here. They should meet the following requirements: Operation system：Windows XP Home/XP Professional + SP2 / SP3, Windows Vista Home/Ultimate 32bit , Windows 7 Home/Ultimate 32bit . RAM：1024MB at least
Figure 3-1 Checking “Properties” of “My computer”
3-3
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade
Operating system
RAM
Figure 3-2 System properties 2. Right-click the desktop and select “Properties”, and then click the “Settings” tag to enter the screen shown in Figure 3-4. You can check the resolution of the display here. It should meet the following requirements: Resolution：1024 x 768 or higher (adjust as shown in Figure )；
Figure 3-3 Checking “Properties” of desktop
3-4
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade
Screen resolution
Figure 3-4 Setting screen resolution 3. Double-click “My Computer” to enter the screen shown in Figure 3-5. You can check the space available on each disk here. It should meet the following requirements: Hard disk space：4GB available on one disk at least.
Disk space
Figure 3-5 My computer Then, close the above 3 dialog boxes.
3-5
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade
The PC hardware configuration and operation system must meet the foregoing requirements. Otherwise, the analyzer can not work properly.
3-6
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade
3.3 Package Checking and Unpacking 3.3.1 Checks before unpacking Please check if the package is intact before unpacking.
3.3.2 Unpacking Main Unit 1. The appearance of the main unit is shown in Figure 3-6. Cut off the binding belt before unpacking.
Figure 3-6 External package of main unit 2. Cut off the binding belt and remove the wooden cover. Then, remove the accessory box shown in the figure below.
3-7
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade
Figure3-7 Remove wooden cover
3. Lift the carton to expose the main unit.
Figure3-8 Remove accessory box
4. Remove the protection foam from both sides of the main unit.
3-8
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade
Figure3-9 Remove carton
5. Remove the plastic bag from the main unit. Grab the bottom of the main unit and lift it onto a countertop. Note that the main unit must be lifted by at least two persons.
Figure 3-10 Lift main unit
When lifting the main unit, keep it as level as possible.
3.3.3 Checking packing list Check the delivered components against the packing list to see if everything is delivered.
3-9
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade
3.4 Removal and Installation 1. Open the right door of the main unit, remove the plastic cable tie vertically fixing the sampling assembly and remove the clamp fixing the synchronous belt, as Figure 3-11 shows.
Figure 3-11 Remove the plastic cable tie and the clamp 2. Copy the installation files from the disk to the U drive. Then, plug the U drive to the USB interface and then open the installation folder. 3. Double-click “Setup.exe” to install the software. 4. A progress bar shown in Figure 3-12 will pop up. Please wait while the software is installing the components needed.
Figure 3-12 Installing the components needed
3-10
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade 5. An installation directory box will pop up with the default directory: D:\Mindray\Auto Hematology Analyzer. You can click “Browse” to change the directory if necessary. Then, click “Next” to continue installing as shown in Figure 3-13.
Figure 3-13 Selecting directory 6. A progress bar shown in Figure 3-14 will pop up. Please wait while the software is being installed.
Figure 3-14 Progress bar 7. When the copying operation of the software is finished, a process bar shown in Figure 3-15 will pop up. Please wait while the software is performing post-installation tasks.
Figure 3-15 Continuing installing 8. The message box shown in Figure 3-16 will pop up when the installation of the software is finished. Click “OK” to close the message box and the entire procedure of the installation /upgrade is finished.
3-11
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade
Figure 3-16 Installation finished.
If it is found that the main unit software mismatches the PC software, you should upgrade the main unit software as per the procedures specified in 3.11.2 to match it with the software of the PC-end.
9. Install the driver program of the printer properly on the PC. 10. The hematology analyzer consists of the IPU PC and the main unit as designed. Only basic interactive keys are located on the main unit like the [Aspirate] key. The rest of the operations are realized through the IPU PC. The IPU PC has two network interfaces, one connecting the main unit and the other one may connect to other information devices (e.g. LIS system) or the LAN of the hospital, which are used to export data. There are two icons of “Local Area Connection” for the two network interfaces existed. follow the procedures to configure the network interfaces of the IPU PC: (1) Right click “My Network Places” and select “Properties” from the pop-up dialog box.
Figure 3-17 Right clicking “Network neighbor” (2) Right click one of the network interfaces and select “Properties”. In the pop-up message box, select the check box of “Show icon in notification area when connected” and “Notify me when this connection has limited or no connectivity”, and then click “OK”. Repeat this procedure to set the other network interface.
3-12
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade
Figure 3-18 Connection properties (3) At the “Local Area Connection Properties” screen, select “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)” and then click “Properties”. At the pop-up screen, select “Use the following IP address”, and then enter 10.0.0.1 into the “IP address” box and 255.255.255.0 into the “Subnet mask” box, as shown in Figure 3-19 .
Figure 3-19 Setting IP address 3-13
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade (4) Then, click “OK” to save all the settings.
Never set the “Default gateway” and DNS server for the network interface (10.0.0.1) connecting the main unit. Otherwise, you may not access to the network connecting the other network interface.
If other computers or network are connected to the IPU PC (through the other network interface), be sure that the IP address 10.0.0.1 (used by the IPU PC) or 10.0.0.2 (used by the main unit) is not applied to other computers or computers in the other network.
11. The LIS computer is used to transmit data by connecting the IPU computer. Do as follows to check and set the IP for the LIS computer. (1) At the desktop of the LIS computer, right click “My Network Places” and select “Properties” from the pop-up dialog box, as shown in Figure 3-20 .
Figure 3-20 “Network Neighbor” (LIS computer) (2) Right click the “Local Area Connection” icon and select “Properties”, as shown in Figure 3-21 .
Figure 3-21 Connection properties 3-14
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade Then, the following box will pop up:
Figure 3-22 Connection properties (LIS computer) (3) At the “Local Area Connection Properties” screen, double click “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)” to enter the following screen.
3-15
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade
Figure 3-23 Setting IP address (4) Check and record the IP address shown in the screen. It will be used to set the IP information on the main unit. (5) If the IP address is not displayed here, you should set it manually (do not set the gateway and DNS server). After setting the IP address, the subnet mask will be generated automatically. Then, click “OK” to save the settings.
The IP address you set here can not be 10.0.0.1 or 10.0.0.2.
3-16
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade
3.5 Connections 1. See Figure 3-24 for connections of reagent and waste containers. Note that the V-53LEO(I) lyse, V-53LEO(II) lyse, V-53LH lyse and the analyzer should be placed in a plane of the same level, and the V-53D diluent, V-53 cleanser, and waste containers should be placed under the countertop.
Figure 3-24 Connections of reagent and waste containers Make sure the tubes are electrically isolated. See Figure 3-25 for proper connections of reagent and waste containers. Note that the tube connectors and their counterparts on the analyzer are of the same colors.
Figure 3-25 linking wires and lines
2. Locate the power inlet at the back of the main unit and connect the female end of the power cable to the power inlet, and connect the three-pronged end of the power cable to a 3-17
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade power outlet.
Figure 3-26 Connection of PC and power supply
3. Connect the Main Unit with the IPU computer by a cross network cable, as shown in Figure 3-27 .
Figure 3-27 Connecting the main unit and the IPU computer
Be sure to use the cross network cable to connect the analyzer and the IPU computer.
The two ends of a cross network cable have no difference. You can plug them to the main unit and the IPU computer respectively at will. Please see appendix H for method of how to distinguish a cross network cable from a direct-connected network cable.
4. There are two ways to connect the hematology analyzer and the LIS computer. 3-18
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade (1) Connect the hematology analyzer with the LIS computer by a cross network cable, as shown in Figure 3-28 .
Figure 3-28 Connecting the main unit and the LIS computer
Be sure to use the cross network cable to connect the analyzer and the LIS computer.
The two ends of a cross network cable can be randomly plugged into the two computers respectively.
(2) Connect the IPU computer to the LAN of the hospital, as shown in Figure 3-29 .
Figure 3-29 Connecting the IPU computer and LAN
Be sure to use the direct-connected network cable to connect the IPU computer to the LAN.
The two ends of a direct-connected network cable can be randomly plugged into the IPU computer and the network devices (HUB, Exchanger, Router, etc.) respectively.
3-19
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade
Adopt one of the two ways to finish the network connection according to the condition of the hospital or doctor’s requirement. 5. Connect the printer with the IPU computer with specified cable and connect the power cord properly.
3-20
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade
3.6 Start-up 3.6.1 Inspection before Startup Check and make sure the marks on the relieve valve are on the same line, as shown in Figure 3-30. Change the relieve valve if the marks are not on the same line.
Marks on relieve valve
Figure 3-30 Marks on relieve valve 1. Check and make sure the sampling tube and the two pipes connected the probe wipe are not bended and clogged at the place of the flatten cable clamp (at top of the sampling assembly), as shown in Figure 3-31. Check and make sure the sampling tube and the two pipes connected the probe wipe are not bended and clogged here. Figure 3-31 Sampling and probe wipe tubing 2. Before starting up, remove the right door of the analyzer, and then check and make sure the tubes connecting the V25, V26 and the tee-connector of the volumetric tube are not bended and clogged, as Figure 3-32 shows.
3-21
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade
Check and make sure the tubes connecting the V25, V26 and the tee-connector of the volumetric tube are not bended and clogged
Figure 3-32 Tubing free from bending and clogging 3. Check and make sure the thick 50 tube connecting the V27 is not bended and clogged, as Figure 3-33 shows.
Check and make sure the thick 50 tube connecting the V27 is not bended and clogged
Figure 3-33 Tubing free from bending and clogging 4. Check and make sure the two-way connector and the tee connector connecting tube 1 are in the same distance towards the pinch valve, as shown in Figure 3-34 .
3-22
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade
Two-way connector
Tube 1
Tee connector Figure 3-34 Checking the pinch valve
3.6.2 Start up for the first time
1. Turn on the main unit, wait a moment and then a prompt
will appear
on the task bar. It means the local-connection-related network interface connects the main
unit already. Similarly, if the other prompt
appears on the task
bar, it means the local-connection-2-related network interface doesn’t connect the main unit, and it is available to connect the LAN of the hospital. If the two prompts are all
then, you should unplug the network cable connecting the main unit from the IPU computer, and then plug it into the other network interface; then, plug the network cable connecting the LIS computer into the rest network interface. 2. Double click the “Auto Hematology Analyzer” icon on the desktop of the IPU computer to start up the software. Then, enter the user name “service” and the password “Se s700” (note: there is a space between “e” and ”s”) into the login box, as shown in Figure 3-35 , and then click “OK” to initialize the analyzer.
3-23
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade
Figure 3-35 Logging in 3. During the initialization, a dialog box “Skip fluidic initialization?” will pop up. Click “No” to continue the initialization.
Figure 3-36 “Skip fluidic initialization?” 4. When initialization is finished, click “Menu” “Setup” “Communication” to enter the screen shown below. Set the IP address and Port here, and then click “OK” to save the settings.
3-24
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade
Figure 3-37 Communication setup
The IP address you set here should be the one of the LIS computer connecting the IPU computer. The Port you set here should be the interception port of the LIS computer. The IP address of external server cannot be 10.0.0.1 and 10.0.0.2, and format like 10.0.0.* is not recommended.
5. Before transmitting data, make sure the LIS computer connecting the IPU computer is working. Thus, the IPU program could locate the destination for transmitting. 6. If the connection is established between the IPU computer and the LIS computer, the “LIS” icon in the IPU screen will turn to colorful, as shown in Figure 3-38, indicating you can start transmitting data now.
Figure 3-38 LIS communication
3-25
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade
The data communication will be terminated automatically once the IPU software is closed. The LIS computer is the server terminal and the IPU software is the customer terminal. The IPU software keeps trying to connect after starting up, if it is intercepted correctly by the server terminal, then the connection will be established and ready for communication.
The IPU computer can connect LIS computer through cross network cable; connect LIS computer in the same network through devices like HUBs or exchangers; connect LIS computer in a different network through devices like routers.
3.6.3 Inspection after Startup 1. Click “Menu”→“Service”→“Version and Config. Information”, as shown in Figure 3-39 to enter the version and configuration information screen shown in Figure 3-40.
Figure 3-39 Menu option
3-26
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade
Figure 3-40 Version and config. Info. 2. Boot Software, Application Software, Operating System, Driver Board FPGA, Driver Board MCU, Data board FPGA, Fluidics Sequence and Algorithm Library, as shown in Figure 3-40, and then close the message box. 3. Do the background count once again. Check if there is fluid hanging on the exterior wall or the tip of the sample probe. If the fluid were found, find out the cause and remove the error. Then, do the background count again until there is no fluid.
Sample probe
Figure 3-41 Observing the sample probe 4. Use the cross-headed screw driver to remove the screws fixing the shielding cover of the bath, and then remove the shielding cover as shown in Figure 3-42. Then, do the background count once. Check and make sure there is no spill when WBC and RBC bath dispensing fluid but the bath bubbles normally during the count, as shown in Figure 3-43. Otherwise, you should find out the cause and remove the error.
3-27
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade
M3X8 assembled scrwes Figure 3-42 Removing bath shielding cover
Two dispensing tubes of WBC bath
Dispensing tubes of RBC bath
Bubbling area of WBC bath
Bubbling area RBC bath
Figure 3-43 Observing when the bath dispensing fluid and bubbling 5. Check and make sure there is no fluid hanging in the WBC and RBC volumetric tube. Otherwise, change the volumetric tube accordingly, as shown in Figure 3-44.
3-28
of
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade
Liquid level of WBC volumetric tube
Liquid level of RBC volumetric tube
Figure 3-44 Observing liquid level of volumetric tubes
3-29
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade
3.7 Setup and Adjustment 3.7.1 Setting Parameters 1. At the main screen, click “Menu”→“Setup”→“Reagent” to enter the reagent screen where you can set the expiration date for the reagents, as shown in Figure 3-45.
Figure 3-45 Clicking “Reagent” 2. Set the expiration date for the following reagents: “Diluent”, “LEO (I) Lyse”, “LEO (II) Lyse”, “LH Lyse” and “Cleanser”.
3-30
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade
Figure 3-46 Setting the expiration date 3. At the main screen, click “Menu”→“Setup”→“Advanced” to enter the screen shown in Figure 3-48.
Figure 3-47 Entering “Advance” screen
3-31
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade
Figure 3-48 “Advance” screen 4. Confirm whether the WBC and RBC count mean time that you recorded previously complies with the time displayed in the screen, as shown in Figure 3-48. Enter the recorded mean time if the time displayed doesn’t comply with the recorded one. Then, use the cross-headed screw driver to re-assemble the screws, fixing the shielding cover of the volumetric board and the bath.
3.7.2 Adjusting Position 1. Press the [Aspirate] key. Then, the analyzer will run a background count once. 2. At the Count screen, click the “Special info.” button as shown in Figure 3-49 to enter the special information screen shown in Figure 3-50.
3-32
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade
Figure 3-49 Clicking “Special info.”
Figure 3-50 “Special info.” screen 3. Firstly, make sure the DIFF pulse data length is less than 200. Otherwise, do the background count till the DIFF pulse data length is less than 200, as shown in Figure 3-50. Use the cross-headed screw driver to remove the shielding cover of the volumetric board, as shown in Figure 3-51. Make sure the WBC Start signal delay is within [2.5, 3] and the RBC Start signal delay is within [4, 4.5]. If they are found out of the limit, use the positioning fixture to measure the distance between the tee connector under the volumetric tube and the lower fixing plate of the volumetric board, and according to the WBC and RBC Start signal delay to fine adjust the distance, as shown in Figure 3-52. When WBC start signal delay is less than 2.5s, fine adjust the WBC volumetric tube downwards; When WBC start signal delay is more than 3s, fine adjust the WBC volumetric tube upwards; When RBC start signal delay is less than 4s, fine adjust the RBC volumetric 3-33
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade tube downwards; When RBC start signal delay is more than 4.5s, fine adjust the RBC volumetric tube upwards. When the WBC and RBC Start signal delay are within the limit, do the background count three times consecutively to check and make sure the two values are within the range every time, and then record the values of the last time. Meanwhile, check the WBC and RBC count time and calculate the mean time. Then, close the special info. message box.
Be sure to adjust the position of the volumetric tube by your hand directly. Never pull the tee connector hard to adjust, otherwise, the tee connector may leak.
Two M3X8 screws
Figure 3-51 Removing the shielding cover of the volumetric board
Adjust distance
Lower fixing plate of the volumetric board Tee connector under the volumetric tube Figure 3-52 Distance under the volumetric tube
3-34
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade
3.8 Testing Other Functions Click “Menu”→“Setup”→“Print” to enter the print screen. You can set the connection between the IPU computer and the printer here, as shown in Figure 3-53.
Figure 3-53 Print Setup
3-35
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade
3.9 Confirming Gain 3.9.1 HGB blank voltage After the transportation and initialization, the HGB blank voltage required may differ from the factory settings. Thus, confirming and adjusting the HGB blank voltage through gain setup is necessary. 1. Entering the setup screen At the main screen, click “Menu→ Setup→Gain” to enter the screen.
Figure 3-54 Setup screen 2. Confirming the HGB gain You can adjust the HGB blank voltage by adjusting the HGB gain. The HGB blank voltage shall be set to 4.48-4.52 V, 4.50V is favorable. Do as follows to adjust: At the “Gain” screen, click the adjusting button of the “HGB current value” to set the HGB blank voltage to 4.48-4.52 V, 4.50V is favorable.
3.9.2 Confirming Optical System After the transportation, the gain of the DIFF channel of the optical system may differ from the factory settings. 3-36
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade Thus, adjusting the gain of the optical system is necessary. Do as follows to adjust: 1. At the “Count” screen, select Next Sample as “Dog - WB - CBC+DIFF” and then perform the background count once and make sure the background results meet the specified requirement. 2. At the “Count” screen, select the work mode as “Dog - WB - CBC+DIFF”. Then, prepare the standard particle sample at the ratio that dispenses 3 drops of standard particles into 1ml distilled water. Then, well mix the sample and run the sample once.
Be sure to use the distilled water to prepare the standard particle sample. Prepared standard particle sample should be run within 12 hours.
3. When finish running, enter the “Table” screen and select the standard particle sample just run, and then click the “Optical” button.
Figure 3-55 “Table” review screen 4. At the “Optical” screen, click the “Calculate” button. Check and make sure the FS Gravity Center Position is within (16.56，19.54), SS Gravity Center Position within (100.18，108.3), FS 0.1max width no more than 6.79, and SS 0.1max width no more than 16.09. Then click "Close".
3-37
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade
Figure 3-56 Optical screen
5. If the peak position and 0.1max width of the standard particles do not meet the requirements, calibrate the optical gain as per Section 3.9.3 Gain of Optical System.
3.9.3 Gain of Optical System 1、At the “Count” screen, select the work mode as “Dog - WB - CBC+DIFF”. Then, prepare the standard particle sample at the ratio that dispenses 3 drops of standard particles into 1ml distilled water. Then, well mix the sample and run the sample once.
Be sure to use the distilled water to prepare the standard particle sample. Prepared standard particle sample should be run within 12 hours.
2、When finish running, enter the “Table” screen and select the standard particle sample just run, and then click the “Optical” button.
3-38
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade
Figure 3-57 “Table” review screen 3、At the “Optical” screen, click the “Calculate” button. Then enter the target of the standard particle into the peak target of FS and SS of particle 1, FS taget:18.1;SS target:104.2. The analyzer will automatically calculate and record the proper gain for FS and SS. Click the “Gain Setup” button to apply all species FS and SS values. Click “Close” to exit the optical screen.
3-39
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade
Figure 3-58 Optical screen 4、Click “Menu→Setup→Gain”.
Figure 3-59 Gain setup screen
3-40
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade
3.10 Calibration and Performance Test 3.10.1
Background Count
Back to the “Count” screen and perform the background count in “Dog – WB - CBC+DIFF” mode. The background results shall meet the specified requirement: WBC:≤0.1×109/L, RBC:≤0.03×1012/L, HGB:≤1g/L, HCT:≤0.5%, PLT:≤5×109/L.
3.10.2
Carryover
Follow the procedure 3 instructed in section 9.3.1 of the Operator’s Manual to make sure the carryover of the analyzer meets the requirements listed in the table below:
3.10.3
Parameter
Carryover
WBC
≤0.5％
RBC
≤0.5％
HGB
≤0.6％
HCT
≤0.5％
PLT
≤1.0％
Reproducibility
In the “Dog – WB - CBC+DIFF” mode, make sure the reproducibility of the analyzer meets the requirements specified in Appendix B 5.4 of the Operator’s Manual The CV requirements for whole blood mode: Para.
Condition
CV% / absolute deviation d (WB)
WBC
(6.00-15.00)×109/L
≤3.0％
12
RBC
(3.50-10.00)×10 /L
≤2.0%
HGB
(110-180) g/L
≤2.0%
MCV
(60-95) fL
≤1.0%
PLT
9
(150-500)×10 /L
≤6.0%
The CV requirements for predilute mode: Para.
Condition
CV% / absolute deviation d (PD)
WBC
(6.00-15.00)×109/L
≤4.0％
12
RBC
(3.50-10.00)×10 /L
≤3.0%
HGB
(110-180) g/L
≤3.0%
MCV
(60-95) fL
≤1.0%
PLT
9
(150-500)×10 /L
≤8.0%
3-41
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade
3.10.4
Calibration
1. Click “Menu→Calibration”, and then click “Calibrator” to enter the screen. Select the calibration mode as “Whole Blood”; enter the lot No. and the expiration date of the calibrator, and then enter the WBC, RBC, HGB, MCV, PLT and WBCO targets of the calibrator into the table. Enter the WBC target value in the WBCO target field (the WBC and WBCO target values are the same).
Figure 3-60 Calibration (WB) 2. Click the “Start” button.
3-42
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade
Figure 3-61 Calibration (WB) 3. Well mix the calibrator and then open the cap and present the calibrator under the sample probe, making sure the sample probe is plunged into the calibrator, and then press the aspirate key. When you hear the beep, remove the calibrator. The analyzer will start running automatically. Run the calibrator consecutively for 12 times.
Be sure to immerse the tip of the sample probe into the calibrator.
3-43
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade
Figure 3-62 Calibration (WB) When “Calibrator calibration done!” pops up, Click “OK”. When you switch to another screen, the “Note” dialog box will pop up.
3-44
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade
Figure 3-63 Calibration (WB) Click “Yes” to save the new calibration factors while closing the message box and switching to another screen. Click “No” to close the message box without saving and switch to another screen. Click “Cancel” close the message box. 4. Click “Diluent” and then present the tube under the sample probe, and then press the aspirate key to start dispensing the diluent, as Figure 3-64 shows. Dispense the diluent into the tube for 6 times consecutively.
Figure 3-64 Dispensing diluent 5. Well mix the calibrator. Set the pipette to 120μL and then aspirate the calibrator. 6. Clean the tip of the pipette by lint-free tissue, and then dispense the aspirated calibrator into the tube loading the diluent and well mix it by the pipette, as Figure 3-65 shows.
3-45
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade
Figure 3-65 Mix the sample 7. Back to the “Calibrator” screen, and then select the calibration mode as “Predilute” and enter the lot No. and the expiration date of the calibrator, and then enter the WBC, RBC, HGB, MCV, PLT and WBCO targets of the calibrator into the table. Enter the WBC target value in the WBCO target field (the WBC and WBCO target values are the same).
Figure 3-66 Calibration (PD) 3-46
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade 8. Click the “Start” button.
Figure 3-67 Calibration (PD) 9. Present the calibrator well mixed as instructed by procedure 6 under the sample probe, making sure the sample probe is plunged into the calibrator, and then press the aspirate key, as Figure 3-68 shows. When you hear the beep, remove the calibrator. The analyzer will start running automatically. Run the calibrator consecutively for 12 times.
Be sure to immerse the tip of the sample probe into the calibrator.
Figure 3-68 Predilute calibrator sampling
3-47
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade
Figure 3-69 Calibration (PD) When “Calibrator calibration done!” pops up, Click “OK”. When you switch to another screen, the “Note” dialog box will pop up.
3-48
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade
Figure 3-70 Calibration (PD) Click “Yes” to save the new calibration factors while closing the message box and switching to another screen. Click “No” to close the message box without saving and switch to another screen. Click “Cancel” close the message box.
3-49
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade
3.11 Software upgrade 3.11.1
Upgrading the PC installed software
1. Release the Installation package on the disk and copy them to the U drive. Plug the U drive to the USB interface and open the folder containing the installation package. Double click the “setup.exe” to start the installation, a progress bar will pop up as shown in Figure 3-71 Please wait when software is installing components needed.
Figure 3-71 Installing components needed 2. At the pop-up box shown in Figure 3-72, select “Upgrade” and click “Next” to upgrade the program. (If you need to install the software as a new one, select “Install” and click “Next”).
Figure 3-72 Upgrading database
3-50
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade 3. Then, a progress bar shown in Figure 3-73 will appear. Pleas wait when software is copying files.
Figure 3-73 Copying files 4. After the copying operation is finished, a progress bar will pop up when software is performing post-installation operations.
Figure 3-74 Upgrade complete 5. When the upgrade is finished, a dialog box shown in Figure 3-75 will pop up. Click “OK” to complete the upgrade of the PC installed software.
Figure 3-75 Upgrade complete
3.11.2
Upgrading the software of the main unit (analyzer)
1. Click “Start” → “All Programs” → “Auto Hematology Analyzer software” → “Analyzer Upgrade”, as shown in Figure 3-76, and then a message shown in Figure 3-77 will pop up. Click “Analyzer Upgrade” and a login message box will pop up. Enter the user name: “service”, and password: “Se s700”, and then click “OK”, as shown in Figure 3-78.
3-51
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade
Figure 3-76 Clicking “Analyzer Upgrade”
Figure 3-77 “Analyzer Upgrade” message box
3-52
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade
Figure 3-78 Login box 2. If the software version is lower than 1.5(EDH002), “Upgrade Preparing” operation is needed. Please wait until the operation is finished. Then follow the pop-up message to restart the analyzer.
Figure 3-79 Upgrade Preparing finished. 3. An upgrade directory message box will then pop up. Click “Browse”, and then select the “update” folder of the main unit upgrade files, and then click “OK”, as shown in Figure 3-80. Then, click “OK” in the pop-up message box, as shown in Figure 3-81. Then, the message box as shown in Figure 3-82 will pop up, click “OK” to enter the screen shown in Figure 3-83, where you can select the upgrade items, and then click “OK”.
3-53
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade
Figure 3-80 Selecting upgrade files
Figure 3-81 Message box after selecting the upgrade files
Figure 3-82 Note
3-54
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade
Figure 3-83 Upgrade items screen 4. Then, the selected items will be upgraded automatically, as shown in Figure 3-84. Please wait for moment. When finish upgrading, a message box will pop up to ask you to restart the main unit as shown in Figure 3-85, click “OK” to close it.
Figure 3-84 Progress bar 3-55
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade
Figure 3-85 Upgrade complete
5. Then, restart the main unit to complete the upgrade.
Never try to delete the files under ftp://10.0.0.2/3101 before upgrading.
Do not cut off the power supply of the analyzer during upgrading.
3-56
4
Fluidic System
4.1 Introduction of Fluidic Parts 4.1.1 Sample probe Aspirates and dispenses the blood sample
4.1.2 Probe Wipe Washes the interior and exterior of the sample probe
4.1.3 Pumps P1: provides pressure for the pressure chamber to generate bubbles. P2: empties the DIFF bath and vacuum chamber and creates vacuum. P3: empties the probe wipe, WBC bath and RBC bath.
4.1.4 Syringes
Aspiration-Syringe: full volume 100 μl; it aspirates and dispenses samples and aspirates the second diluted sample.
Diluent-Syringe: full volume 12ml; it dispenses diluent into the WBC and RBC bath and supplies the diluent to the probe wipe.
Lyse-Syringe: full volume 2.5ml; 3 syringes are driven by a motor; it dispenses M-53Leo (I), M-53Leo (II) and M-53H.
Sheath-Syringe: full volume 12ml; it dispenses the sheath into the flow cell, cleans the flow cell and DIFF bath, and is also be used for sample preparation.
Sample-Syringe: full volume 250μl; it dispenses the sample into the flow cell.
4.1.5 Valves
Fluidic valve: turns on and off by electromagnetic force; controls the fluidic or air flow direction.
Pinch valve: turns on and off by electromagnetic force; starts/stops the fluidic flow.
Pressure switch: alarms when the pressure inside the tubing exceeds 1.5Bar
4-1
Fluidic System
4.1.6 Baths
WBC bath: consists of a front bath, back bath and aperture. The WBC sample mixes and reacts here and it is used for the measurement of HGB and WBC.
RBC bath: consists of a front bath, back bath and aperture. The RBC sample mixes and reacts here and it is used for the measurement of RBC/PLT.
DIFF bath: DIFF sample mixes and reacts here.
Vacuum chamber: creates and stores stable vacuum for counting the WBC and RBC by impedance method; cleans the back bath and empties the volumetric tube.
Pressure chamber: creates and stores stable pressure to generate bubbles for the baths.
WBC isolation chamber: provides air buffer to isolate outside interference
RBC isolation chamber: provides air buffer to isolate outside interference
4.1.7 Volumetric tube
WBC volumetric tube: volume 500ul; it measures the volume of the WBC sample
RBC volumetric tube: volume 300ul; it measures the volume of the RBC sample
4.1.8 Filters
Filter of WBC volumetric tube: it filters the air entered the WBC volumetric tube
Filter of RBC volumetric tube: it filters the air entered the RBC volumetric tube
P1 filter: it filters the air entered the air pump.
4-2
Fluidic System
4.2 Fluidic System 4.2.1 Reagent volume required
Sample analysis for a single sample each time
2 analysis modes: Open vial-whole blood mode and open vial-predilute mode. Table 4-1 Reagent volume required when running samples Reagents
Name
Diluent Lyse
Volume of single analysis CBC+DIFF
CBC
V -53D Diluent
45mL
30mL
V -53LEO(I) Lyse
1.8ml
0
V -53LEO(II) Lyse
0.15ml
0
V -53LH Lyse
0.5ml
Normal startup function (excluding background)
Reagents volume required: Table 4-2 Reagents volume required when starting up normally Reagents
Name
Volume of normal startup
Diluent
V -53D Diluent
89ml
V -53LEO(I) Lyse
0
V -53LEO(II) Lyse
0
V -53LH Lyse
2ml
V -53 Cleanser
0
Lyse Cleanser
Abnormal startup function (excluding background)
Reagents volume required: Table 4-3 reagents volume required when starting up abnormally Reagents
Name
Volume of abnormal startup
Diluent
V -53D Diluent
172ml
V -53LEO(I) Lyse
0
V -53LEO(II) Lyse
0
V -53LH Lyse
2ml
V -53 Cleanser
0
Lyse Cleanser
Starting up a drained system (after the Prepare to Ship procedure has be done)(excluding startup background) 4-3
Fluidic System Reagents volume required: Table 4-4 reagents volume required for starting up a drained system (after the Prepare to Ship procedure has been done) Volume of starting up a Reagents
drained system (after the
Name
prepare to ship procedure has been done)
Diluent Lyse Cleanser
V -53D Diluent
207ml
V -53LEO(I) Lyse
12ml
V -53LEO(II) Lyse
12ml
V -53LH Lyse
12ml
V -53 Cleanser
8ml
Normal shutdown function
Reagents volume required: Table 4-5 reagents volume required when normally shutting down Reagents
Name
Volume of normal shutdown
Diluent
V -53D Diluent
53ml
V -53LEO(I) Lyse
0
V -53LEO(II) Lyse
0
V -53LH Lyse
0
V -53 Cleanser
29ml
Lyse Cleanser
4-4
Fluidic System
4.2.2 Fluidic System Drawing
Figure 4-1 Fluidic system (Whole Blood Mode)
Figure 4-2 Fluidic system (Predilute Mode)
4-5
Fluidic System
4.2.3 WBC Measurement Procedures WBC Count/BASO channel
The reagents used include:
LH Lyse: it lyses erythrocytes and platelets and separates basophiles from other WBCs. Diluent: it is used for cleaning and provides the environment for reaction and measurement.
Principles: Electrical Impedance Method
Parameters: WBC, BASO# and BASO%
Diagrams: WBC histogram
Dilute ratio: 1:501
Metering volume: 500
Function description: 6μl blood sample, 2.5ml diluent and 0.5ml LH Lyse are mixed in the bath, and then they react. After reaction, the sample flows to the back bath via the aperture, driven by the vacuum, and the blood cells are counted when passing through the aperture. The volume of the sample is measured by the volumetric tube.
DIFF channel
The reagents used include:
LEO (I) and LEO (II): they lyse RBCs and differentiate WBCs into 4 sub-populations. Diluent: cleans the fluidic system and provides sheath.
Principles: flow cytometry and semiconductor laser scatter
Parameters: MONO#, MONO%, LYMPH#, LYMPH %, NEUT#, NEUT%, EOS# and EOS%
Diagrams: 4-DIFF scattergram
Dilute ratio: 1:136
Metering volume: 131μl
Function description: 0.6ml Leo (I) is dispensed into the bath as the initial volume, and then 10μl blood sample and 0.6ml Leo (I) are dispensed. After the sample is well mixed and reacts with the reagent for a while, 0.15ml Leo (II) is dispensed. After the sample reacts with the reagents for a while, the sample is driven to the bottom of the flow cell and the sheath flow is enabled. Then the sample is dispensed into the flow cell by the sample syringe for measurement.
4-6
Fluidic System
4.2.4 RBC/PLT Measurement Procedures RBC/PLT channel
The reagents used include:
Diluent: dilutes samples, washes, provides a conductive environment and processes the cells
Principles: Electrical Impedance Method
Parameters: RBC and PLT
Diagrams: RBC histogram and PLT histogram
Dilute ratio: 1:40000
Metering volume: 300μl
Function description: xxμl sample dilution (y:y) is aspirated by the sample probe from the WBC bath. The sample probe then moves to the RBC bath and mixes the sample with 2.5ml diluent to dilute the sample to the ratio of 1:40000. Then, the mixed sample is driven into the back bath through the aperture by the vacuum, and the blood cells are counted when passing through the aperture. The volume of the sample is measured by the volumetric tube.
4.2.5 HGB Measurement Procedures HGB channel
The reagents used include:
Diluent: dilutes samples and washes LH lyse: lyses the red blood cells and combines the hemoglobin
Principles: Colorimetry
Parameters: HGB
Dilute ratio: 1:500
The HGB unit calculates the concentration of HGB by comparing the light passing through the sample with the blank reference reading.
4-7
Fluidic System
4.3 Sequence of Whole Blood CBC+DIFF Measurement 4.3.1 Sampling and dispensing procedures A.
Aspirating samples and dispensing samples into the DIFF bath
①20μl sample is aspirated by the aspiration syringe from the sample tube, and then the sample probe ascends while its exterior is being cleaned. ②The sample probe moves to above the DIFF bath. ③The sample probe descends into the DIFF bath and dispenses 10μl sample. B.
First Diluting
①The sample probe ascends from the DIFF bath, meanwhile the probe exterior is cleaned. ②The sample probe moves to above the WBC bath ③The sample probe descends into the WBC bath, and then dispenses 10μl sample. The dispensed sample is diluted by the 2.5ml diluent that is already there to form the 1:417.7 dilution. C.
Cleaning the residual sample
①The sample probe ascends from the WBC bath, meanwhile the probe exterior is cleaned. ②The sample probe dispenses diluent into the probe wipe from the top to wash off the residual sample. ③The sample probe descends again into the WBC bath and aspirates the diluted sample. D.
RBC second diluting
①The sample probe ascends from the WBC bath, meanwhile the probe exterior is cleaned. ②The sample probe moves above the RBC bath. ③The sample probe descends into the RBC bath, and then dispenses 1ml diluted sample. The dispensed sample is diluted by the 1.5ml that is already in the bath to form the 1:20000 dilution. E.
Sample probe returning to home position
①The sample probe ascends from the RBC bath, meanwhile the probe exterior is cleaned. ②The sample probe returns to the home position.
4-8
Fluidic System
A
B
C
D
E Figure 4-3 Dispensing procedures of sample probe
4-9
Fluidic System
4.3.2 DIFF Channel Cleaning the reaction bath before dispensing samples（0 - 6s） During this period: 1. The DIFF bath is drained. Then, 0.6ml LEO (I) Lyse is dispensed into the DIFF bath and then the bath is drained again. The sheath syringe and sample syringe aspirate the diluent. 2. During 0-1.5s, valve V38 is energized and waste pump 2 operates to drain the DIFF bath. 3. During 3-4s, valve 05 is energized and the lyse syringe dispenses 0.6ml LEO (I) Lyse into the DIFF bath to clean it. 4. During 4-6s, valve V38 is energized and waste pump 2 operates to drain the DIFF bath and then the DIFF bath is ready to receive sample. 5. Valve 39 is pinched. The sheath syringe and sample syringe aspirate diluent respectively.
Sample dispensing, mixing and DIFF sample preparation (6-19.8s) During this period: 1. Dispensing LEO (I) Lyse for the first time: valve V05 is energized and 0.6ml pre-heated LEO (I) Lyse is dispensed into the DIFF bath via the 2.5ml lyse syringe. 2. Sample dispensing and mixing: The 100ul aspiration syringe dispenses 10ul sample into the DIFF bath and then valve V05 is energized, and then the 2.5ml lyse syringe dispenses 0.6ml pre-heated LEO (I) Lyse into the DIFF bath again. 3. Mixing by bubbling: valve V09 is energized to mix the sample with the LEO(I) lyse by bubbling. 4. Dispensing LEO (II) Lyse: valve V06 is energized and 0.15ml pre-heated LEO (II) Lyse is dispensed into the DIFF bath via the 2.5ml Lyse syringe. 5. Mixing sample by bubbling: valve 09 is energized to mix the sample by bubbling. 6. DIFF sample preparation: valve V39 is de-energized to open the path between the DIFF bath and the syringe. Valve 22 is engerized and valve 23 keeps de-energized. The sheath syringe aspirates 1.2ml sample from the DIFF bath. When the sample preparation is done, the status of the fluidic system of the DIFF unit is shown in Figure 4-4. The tubing highlighted in red is the part that holds the sample.
The sheath flow of the DIFF channel and the measurement (19.8-40.5s) During this period: 1. Sheath fluid forming: V23 and V24 are engergized. The sheath syringe dispenses the diluent into the flow cell at a certain speed to form the sheath. 2. Dispensing the sample at a high speed: The sample syringe dispenses the sample into the flow cell at a high speed. 3. Measurement: when the sample fluid is stable, the sample syringe dispenses the sample 4-10
Fluidic System into the flow cell at a low speed while the sheath syringe dispenses the diluent into the flow cell to surround the sample. Thus, the sheath flow passes through the flow cell at a stable speed for measurement. The fluidic system status of this period is shown in Figure 4-5.
Figure 4-4 Fluidic status of DIFF channel sample preparation
Figure 4-5 Fluidic status of DIFF channel measurement
4-11
Fluidic System
Cleaning of DIFF channel (40.5-59s) During this period: 1. The sample surrounded by the sheath passes through the flow cell. Then, the flow cell and the sample probe are washed. 2. Cleaning the sample preparation tubing: valve V22 are energized and valve V23 and V24 keep energized. The sheath syringe dispenses diluent to clean the sample preparation tubing. Meanwhile, valve 38 is energized and waste pump 2 operates to drain the DIFF bath. 3. Cleaning the DIFF bath a. Dispensing 1.7ml diluent for cleaning: the sheath syringe dispenses 1.7ml diluent into the DIFF bath through V21 and V22 to clean the bath. b. Draining: valve 38 is energized and waste pump 2 operates to drain the DIFF bath. Meanwhile, the sheath syringe aspirates 2ml diluent. c.
Dispensing 2ml diluent for soaking: valve V22, V23 and V24 are energized. The sheath syringe dispenses 2ml diluent to soak the DIFF bath.
4.3.3 WBC/HGB Channel HGB background, cleaning, draining volumetric tube and sample distribution (0-18.2s) 1. 0.1s HGB background test. 2. Creating vacuum: the vacuum used for draining the volumetric tube and cleaning the back bath is provided by the vacuum chamber. Thus, the waste pump is needed to create the vacuum in the vacuum chamber. 3. Zapping and cleaning the back bath. 4. Draining the WBC bath: valve V36 is energized and waste pump 3 operates to drain the WBC bath. 5. Draining the WBC volumetric tube: valve V25 and V31 are energized to drain the volumetric tube for three times.
4-12
Fluidic System
Figure 4-6 Fluidic status when draining WBC volumetric tube
6. WBC sample distribution: a. At 8.9s, valve V02, V03 and V27are energized and the waste pump operates. The sample probe ascends while the diluent syringe dispenses the diluent to clean the exterior of the sample probe. b. Dispensing initial volume and sample probe moving to the WBC bath: valve V03 is energized. The 10ml diluent syringe dispenses a small portion of the diluent into the WBC bath as the initial volume. The sample probe moves to the WBC bath, and then descends into the WBC bath. c.
Dispensing the blood sample: the aspiration syringe dispenses 6 μl sample into the WBC bath while mixing the sample by bubbling.
Dispensing lyse and mixing (18.3-25s) 1. The sample probe ascending: the sample probe ascends from the WBC bath, meanwhile its exterior is washed. 2. Dispensing HGB lyse and mixing: valve V07 is energized. The 2.5ml lyse syringe dispenses the LH Lyse into the WBC bath and the samples mixes with the lyse by bubbling. The system waits for the sample becoming stable.
Creating vacuum (18.1-25s) Vacuum is the power that drives the fluid movement. Waste pump 2 pumps out the air in the vacuum chamber to create the vacuum between -270HPa and -250HPa.
Counting and bath cleaning 1. WBC counting: valve V33 is energized to start counting. Driven by the stable vacuum 4-13
Fluidic System （-270 to -250 HPa）, the sample in the front bath flows to the back bath in the direction shown in Figure 4-7. The sample volume measured is determined by the diluent volume that flows between the two photocouplers of the WBC volumemetric tube.. 2. HGB measurement: HGB measurement starts at 42.5s. 3. Cleaning the front bath twice. 4. Cleaning the back bath: valve V29 and V31 are energized. Driven by the vacuum, the diluent enters the volumetric tube via valve V29, and then passes through valve V31 and enters the vacuum chamber. Then, valve V31, V33 and V13 are energized. The diluent flows into the back bath through the volumetric tube to drain the waste in the back bath. Driven by waste pump 2, the waste in the vacuum chamber is drained through V37.
Figure 4-7 Fluidic status when WBC counting
Fi gure 4-8 Fluidic status when cleaning the WBC back bath
4-14
Fluidic System
4.3.4 RBC/PLT Channel Cleaning, volumetric tube draining (0-18.2s) 1. Creating vacuum: the vacuum used for draining the RBC volumetric tube and cleaning the back bath is all provided by the vacuum chamber. Thus, waste pump P2 is used to create the vacuum in the vacuum chamber. 2. Zapping and cleaning the back bath: zap the RBC aperture, and then open V30, V34 and V14 to clean the back bath and drain the bubbles caused by zapping. 3. Draining the RBC bath and volumetric tube: valve V35 is energized and waste pump P3 operates to drain the RBC bath. Then, V26 and V32 are energized together to drain the volumetric tube for three times. 4. First dilution and aspiration: during 0-8.8s, the sample probe finishes sampling and sample is dispensed into the DIFF bath. Thus, the first dilution is formed during the 8.8-18.2s period and then a portion of the diluted sample is aspirated back into the sample probe.
Figure 4-9 Fluidic status when draining RBC volumetric tube
Second diluting and mixing (18.4-25s) 1. Aspirating the first dilution: the aspiration syringe aspirates the sample diluted at the ratio of 1:417.6 from the WBC bath, and then ascends while its exterior is being cleaned. 2. Sample probe moving to RBC bath and dispensing initial volume and the sample: the sample probe moves to the RBC bath. Valve V03 and V08 are energized at the same time, and the diluent syringe dispenses 1.5ml diluent into the RBC bath and then the sample probe descends into the RBC bath. Valve V01 and V03 are energized and the 10ml diluent syringe dispenses the first dilution into the RBC bath to form the second dilution at the ratio 4-15
Fluidic System of 1:40000. 3. Mixing: Valve V11 is energized. Driven by the pressure, the sample is mixed by bubbling for three times.
Creating vacuum (18.1-25s) The stable vacuum is created to drive the fluidics when running samples. Waste pump 2 pumps out the air in the vacuum chamber to create the vacuum between -270HP and -250HP.
Counting and bath cleaning The fluidic status of RBC counting is shown in Figure 4-10. 1. RBC counting: valve V34 is energized to start counting. Driven by the stable vacuum （-270 to -250 HP）, the sample in the front bath flows to the back bath in the direction shown in the following figure. The sample volume measured is determined by the diluent volume that flows between the two photocouplers of the WBC volumetric tube.
Figure 4-10 Fluidic status of RBC counting
4-16
Fluidic System
Figure 4-11 Fluidic status when cleaning the back bath and draining the front bath
2. Draining the front bath and cleaning: Valve V35 is energized and waste pump pumps the remaining sample out of the RBC bath. The diluent syringe dispenses 3ml diluent into the RBC bath for soaking. 3. Cleaning the back bath: The vacuum of -400 to -350HP is created in the vacuum chamber. Valve V30 and V32 are energized. The volumetric tube is cleaned and bubbles are discharged from the top of the volumetric tube. Vale V32, V14, V34 and V30 are energized to clean the back bath, and then the waste is discharged.
4.3.5 Sequence of Predilute Mode CBC+DIFF Measurement In the predilute mode, the sample needs to be first manually diluted at the ratio of 1:10. The sequence inside the analyzer has no great difference with the whole blood mode.
4.3.6 Sequence of CBC Measurement In the CBC mode, the DIFF channel is not used and the sample dispensing procedures are also changed.
Sampling and sample dispensing procedures of CBC Mode
A.
Aspirating sample and dispensing sample into the WBC bath
①15μl sample is aspirated by the aspiration syringe, and then the sample probe ascends meanwhile its exterior is cleaned and the sample probe dispenses 3μl sample into the probe wipe. ②The sample probe moves to above the WBC bath 4-17
Fluidic System ③The sample probe descends into the WBC bath and dispenses 6μl sample into the WBC bath. B.
Cleaning the sample remains
①The sample probe ascends from the WBC bath, meanwhile its exterior is cleaned. ②The sample probe dispenses cleanser into the probe wipe from the top to wash off the residual sample.. ③The sample probe descends again into the WBC bath and aspirates the diluted sample. C.
RBC second dilution
①The sample probe ascends from the WBC bath meanwhile its exterior is cleaned. ②The sample probe moves to above the RBC bath. ③The sample probe descends into the RBC bath, and then dispenses 1ml diluted sample into RBC bath, where the sample is further diluted by the 1.5ml diluent that is alrealy there to form the second dilution at the ratio of 1:40000. D.
Sample probe returning to home position
①The sample probe ascends from the RBC bath meanwhile its exterior is cleaned. ②The sample probe returns to the home position.
A
B
4-18
Fluidic System
C
D
Figure 4-12 Dispensing procedures of sample probe
4-19
5
Hardware System
The hematology analyzer hardware system consists of the boards, power execution parts, sensors, switches and cables. Their relationship is shown below.
Figure 5-1 hardware system structure Note: In the figure, the thin arrows represent the cable connections; the thick arrows (connecting the data board and the driver board) represent the plugboard connections; the square boxes represent the boards and the ellipses represent the components. The boards of the hematology analyzer and their functions are shown in the table below.
5-1
Hardware System
Table 5-1 Boards of the hematology analzyer and their functions No. 1
Name Data board
Functions CPU basic system + FPGA + A/D + Analog channel
2
Drive board
MCU+FPGA+ Valves and pumps driving + Photocoupler detecting + Temperature and pressure monitoring
3
Mother board
Power distribution and centralized wiring. Plugboard supported
4
Laser control board
Laser creating and controlling
5
FS
Collecting and pre-amplifying the low-angle
pre-amplification
board 6 7
SS
scattered light pre-amplification
Collecting and pre-amplifying the high-angle
board
scattered light
Volumetric board
Creating the volumetric signals of RBC and WBC channels; the vacuum and pressure sensors and amplifying the detected signals
8
Indicator board
Buzzer and indicator
9
Power board
Supply D5V,P12V,P24V,A±12V power Supply AC120V/50Hz zapping power
10
Liquid-level board
Liquid-level detection of reagents
5-2
Hardware System
5.1 Mother board 5.1.1 Introduction The function of the mother board is to realize power distribution and centralized wiring of board input/output.
5.1.2 Board Composition The mother board is composed of two slots and several connectors. The two slots are for connecting the data board and the drive board respectively; while the connectors are for various input/output signals.
Function
Power interface
Slot for data board
Slot for drive board
Connectors for board signals (auto-sampler board, laser control board, pre-amp board, volumetric board, liquid level checker, key board and indicator board, etc.)
Connectors for component (valves, pumps, motors, heaters, fan, HGB module, independent key, optics, etc.) signals
Communication interface (COM port and LAN port)
Block diagram
5-3
Hardware System
DB9(rs23 2)
RJ45
rs232 int. driver
Isolate transfoemer
Socket for suck key and right door chec ker
Socket for Indicator and key board
Power filter & indicator
Socket for laser control board
Data borad power
Socket for valume mesure and press control board
Socktes for Data Board
Sockets for pre-amp. board Socket for HGB module
Sockets for Power Supply
RS422 int driver
Drive boatd power
Socket for Autosample
Sockets for vavles,pumps,motors,heat ers
Sockets for Drive Board
Sockets for optics sensor
Socket for fan
Socket for power( Autosa mple board)
Socket for Temp. sensor
Socket for Liq.level checker
Figure 5-2 Function of mother board
Definition of interface
List of connectors Table 5-2 List of connectors SN.
PIN Number
Function Description
PA1
96
Data board connector, digital signals
PA2
96
Data board connector, analog signals
PB1
96
Drive board connector, digital signals and part of optics signals 5-4
Hardware System PB2
96
Drive board connector, part of optics signals and motor drive signals
PB3
96
Drive board connector, drive signals of motors, valves, pumps, and heaters
J1
8
RS-232 LAN port
J2
9
Reserved for COM port debugging
J3
10
Multi-functional JTAG port, debugging or upgrading MCU programs of auto-sampler board
J4
4
RS-422 COM port, COM port of auto-sampler board
J5
8
Indicator board
J6
6
Connector of aspirate key, right door switch, and optical shielding box switch
J7
6
Laser control board connector
J8
8
Reserved for side fluorescence channel (SF)
J9
8
side scatter channel (SS)
J10
8
Connector for forward scatter channel (FS)
J11
5
HGB module connector
J12
8
A+/- 12V connector
J13
3
AC120V connector
J14
6
Temperature sensor connector
J15
12
Volumetric board connector
J16
34
Connector for level sensors and associated photocouplers
J17
No in use
J18
24
Connector for photocouplers 1-6
J19
24
Connector photocouplers 7-12
J20
24
Connector photocouplers 13-18
J21
3
Reserved for DC mix motor
J22
8
Connector stepping motors 1-2
J23
8
Connector stepping motors 3-4
J24
8
Connector stepping motors 5-6
J25
8
Connector stepping motors 7-8
J26
No in use
J27
4
Connector for heater 2
J28
4
Connector for heater 1
J29
20
Connector for pumps 1-7
J30
20
Connector for valves 1-10
J31
20
Connector for valves 11-20
J32
20
Connector for valves 21-30
J33
20
Connector for valves 31-40 5-5
Hardware System
J34
2
Fan connector
J35
10
Connector for P12V and P24V
J36
6
Connector for auto-sampler board power
J37
4
D+5V connector
Data board slots (PA1 and PA2)
Data board slots are two 96pin DIN 41612 connectors. Connector type: AMP VME female connector
3*32PIN vertical connection
Model: 5535043-4 Table 5-3 Definition of PA1 for mother board Column A
Column B
Column C
1
D+5V
D+5V
D+5V
2
D+5V
D+5V
D+5V
3
D+5V
D+5V
D+5V
4
D+5V
D+5V
D+5V
5
D+5V
D+5V
D+5V
6
DGND
DGND
DGND
7
DGND
DGND
DGND
8
DGND
DGND
DGND
9
DGND
DGND
DGND
10
DGND
DGND
DGND
11
DGND
DGND
DGND
12
TP_TX+
PWFBOUT
TP_RX+
13
TP_TX-
DGND
TP_RX-
14
DGND
DGND
DGND
15
DGND
DGND
DGND
16
TMS_TO_DRV
TMS_TO_AS
UART3_TO_PC
17
TCK_TO_DRV
TCK_TO_AS
UART3_TO_DAT
18
DATA_TO_DRV
DATA_TO_AS
DGND
19
DATA_FROM_DR
DATA_FROM_AS
DGND
V 20
DGND
UART1_TO_DAT+
UART1_TO_AS+
21
DGND
UART1_TO_DAT-
UART1_TO_AS-
22
UART0_TO_DRV
DGND
DGND
23
UART0_TO_DAT
DGND
DGND
24
DGND
DGND
#SUCK_KEY
25
DGND
#VM_ON
DGND
26
DGND
#RBC_START
#BUZ
5-6
Hardware System 27
DGND
#RBC_STOP
#COUNT_KEY
28
DGND
#WBC_START
FAULT
29
DGND
#WBC_STOP
READY
30
DGND
DGND
OPTI_DOOR
31
DGND
#LASER_ON
#RIGHT_DOOR
32
DGND
DGND
#INSERT_DOOR
Table 5-4 Definition of PA2 for mother board Column A
Column B
Column C
1
AGND
AGND
AGND
2
AGND
LASER_CURT
AGND
3
AGND
AGND
AGND
4
AGND
AGND
AGND
5
AGND
AGND
AGND
6
AGND
AGND
AGND
7
AGND
AGND
AGND
8
AGND
AGND
AGND
9
AGND
AGND
AGND
10
AGND
AGND
AGND
11
AGND
NC
AGND
12
AGND
AGND
A GND
13
AGND
SS
AGND
14
AGND
AGND
AGND
15
AGND
FS
AGND
16
AGND
AGND
AGND
17
AGND
HGB_IN
AGND
18
AGND
AGND
AGND
19
AGND
HGB+
AGND
20
AGND
HGB-
AGND
21
AGND
A-12V
A-12V
22
AGND
A-12V
A-12V
23
AGND
A+12V
A+12V
24
AGND
A+12V
A+12V
25
AGND
A+12V
A+12V
26
NC
NC
NC
27
NC
A+70V
NC
28
NC
NC
NC
29
NC
NC
NC
5-7
Hardware System
30
NC
AC120_B
NC
31
NC
NC
NC
32
AC120_A
NC
NC
Connector J1 for LAN port
Connector type: RJ-45 female connector with iron casing Model: 5406217-1 Table 5-5 Definition of J1 for mother board Definition
Description
1
ET_TP+
Transmit, positive
2
ET_TP-
Transmit, negative
3
ET_RP+
Receive, positive
4
ET-NGP
Receive, vitual ground
5
ET-NGP
Receive, vitual ground
6
ET_RP-
Receive, negative
7
ET-NGR
Receive, vitual ground
8
ET-NGR
Receive, vitual ground
Connector J2 for COM port
Connector type: DB9 male / female connector Table 5-6 Definition of J2 for mother board (male connector) Pin
Definition
Description
1
NC
2
RXD/TXD
Send/receive
3
TXD/RXD
Receive/send
4
NC
5
GND
6-9
NC
Table 5-7 Definition of J2 for mother board (female connector) Pin
Definition
Description
1
GND
2
NC
3
TXD/RXD
Send/receive
4
RXD/TXD
Receive/send
5-9
NC
Connector J3 for JTAG 5-8
Hardware System Connector type: HEADER WTB 2.54MM DIP2*5 TOP 70246SERIES Model: 70246-1001, MOLEX Table 5-8 Definition of J3 for mother board Pin
Definition
Description
1
D3V3
2
GND
3
GND
4
TCK
JTAG clock
5
TMS
JTAG status select
6
DATA_FROM_AS
JTAG data to data board
7
DATA_TO_AS
JTAG data to drive board
8
NC
9
GND
10
NC
Connector J6 for aspirate key and door switch on/off checking
Connector type: HEADER WTB 2MM DIP1*6SIDE PHSERIES Model: B6B-PH-K 2MM 'JST' Table 5-9 Definition of J6 for mother board Pin
Definition
1
#SUCK_KEY
2
GND
3
#RIGHT_DOOR
4
GND
5
OPTI_DOOR
6
GND
Description Aspirate key on/off, effective low Right door switch on/off optical shielding box switch
Connector J4 for auto-sampler board signal
Connector type: HEADER WTB 2MM DIP1*4SIDE PHSERIES Model: B4B-PH-K 'JST' Table 5-10 Definition of J4 for mother board Pin 1
Definition UART2_TO_AS+
Description 5474 serial port 2 to positive end of sample board data
2
UART2_TO_AS-
5474 serial port 2 to negative end of sample board data
3
UART2_TO_DAT+
sample board serial port to positive end of 5474 serial port data 5-9
Hardware System 4
UART2_TO_DAT-
sample board serial port to negative end of 5474 serial port data
Connector J5 for indicator board
Connector type: HEADER WTB 2MM DIP1*8
TOP PHSERIES
Model: B8B-PH-K 'JST' 2MM Table 5-11 Definition of J5 for mother board Pin
Definition
Description
1
D+5V
2
#COUNT_KEY
NC
3
#INSERT_DOOR
NC
4
FAULT
Fault status indicator light, effective high
5
READY
Ready status indicator light, effective high
6
NC
7
#BUZ
8
GND
Buzzer driven
Connector J7 for laser board
Connector type: HEADER WTB 2.5MM DIP1*6SIDE XHSERIES Model: B-6B-XH-A 'JST' Table 5-12 Definition of J7 for mother board Pin
Definition
1
NC
2
AGND
3
LASER_CURT
4
A+12V
5
#LASER_ON
6
D+5V
Description
Laser current feedback, analog signal Laser source on/off signal, effective low
Connector J9 and J10 for pre-amplification board
Connector type: HEADER WTB 2.5MM DIP1*8SIDE XHSERIES Model: B8B-XH-K 'JST' Table 5-13 Definition of J9, J10 for mother board Pin
Definition
1
AGND
2
FS/SS
Description FS/SS signal input, analog signal
5-10
Hardware System
3
AGND
4
AGND
5
A-12V
6
AGND
7
A+12V
8
MHOLE
Connecting inner shield of cable Connecting external shield of cable
Connector J11 for HGB module
Connector type: HEADER WTB 2MM DIP1*5SIDE PHSERIES Model: B5B-PH-K 'JST' Table 5-14 Definition of J11 for mother board Pin 1
Definition HGB+
Description HGB
light
drive,
light
drive,
positive 2
HGB-
HGB negative
3
HGB_IN
4
AGND
5
AGND
HGB feedback
Connector J12 for analog A12V
Connector type: HEADER WTB 4.2MM DIP2*4 SIDE, 5566 serial Model: 1-794509-1 'JST' Table 5-15 Definition of J12 for mother board Pin
Definition
1
AGND
2
NC
3
NC
4
NC
5
A+12V
6
AGND
7
AGND
8
A-12V
Description
Connector J13 for AC120V
Connector type: HEADER WTB 2.5MM DIP1*3 TOP XHSERIES Model: B-3B-XH-A 'JST' 2.5MM
5-11
Hardware System Table 5-16 Definition of J13 for mother board Pin
Definition
1
AC120V_A
2
NC
3
AC120V_B
Description A end of 120V AC B end of 120V AC
Drive board slots: PB1, PB2 and PB3
DIN41612, 96PIN female Definition of PB1-PB3 signals: Note: On the mother board, PB1 is placed laterally, with column A under it, and row 1 at left side. Since the drive board and mother board is connected vertically, column A should be arranged at the nearest joint side of board. Table 5-17 Definition of PB1 for mother board column A
column B
column C
1
HT1_SA
HT1_SB
AMBI_SA
2
HT2_SA
HT2_SB
AMBI_SB
3
POSI_PRESS
NEGA_PRESS
DGND
4
DGND
DGND
DGND
5
DGND
DGND
DGND
6
DGND
DGND
DGND
7
DGND
DGND
DGND
8
DGND
DGND
DGND
9
DGND
DGND
DGND
10
DGND
DGND
DGND
11
DGND
DGND
DGND
12
D+5V
D+5V
D+5V
13
D+5V
D+5V
D+5V
14
D+5V
D+5V
D+5V
15
D+5V
D+5V
D+5V
16
D+5V
D+5V
D+5V
17
DGND
DGND
DGND
18
#LIQ1
#LIQ2
TMS_TO_DRV
19
#LIQ3
#LIQ4
TCK_TO_DRV
20
#LIQ5
#LIQ6
DATA_TO_DRV
21
#LYSE_SENSOR
#WASTE_SENSOR
DATA_FROM_DRV
22
#LS_ON
DGND
DGND
23
DGND
DGND
DGND
24
OP17_CTRL
OP17_STS
UART0_TO_DRV
5-12
Hardware System 25
OP18_CTRL
OP18_STS
UART0_TO_DAT
26
OP19_CTRL
OP19_STS
DGND
27
OP20_CTRL
OP20_STS
DGND
28
OP1_CTRL
OP1_STS
OP2_CTRL
29
OP2_STS
OP3_CTRL
OP3_STS
30
OP4_CTRL
OP4_STS
OP5_CTRL
31
OP5_STS
OP6_CTRL
OP6_STS
32
OP7_CTRL
OP7_STS
OP8_CTRL
Table 5-18 Definition of PB2 for mother board column A
column B
column C
1
OP8_STS
OP9_CTRL
OP9_STS
2
OP10_CTRL
OP10_STS
OP11_CTRL
3
OP11_STS
OP12_CTRL
OP12_STS
4
OP13_CTRL
OP13_STS
OP14_CTRL
5
OP14_STS
OP15_CTRL
OP15_STS
6
OP16_CTRL
OP16_STS
DM_ON
7
DGND
DGND
DGND
8
NC
NC
NC
9
P+24V
SM1_AP
SM1_AP
10
P+24V
SM1_AN
SM1_AN
11
P+24V
SM1_BP
SM1_BP
12
P+24V
SM1_BN
SM1_BN
13
P+24V
SM2_AP
SM2_AP
14
P+24V
SM2_AN
SM2_AN
15
P+24V
SM2_BP
SM2_BP
16
P+24V
SM2_BN
SM2_BN
17
P+24V
SM3_AP
SM3_AP
18
P+24V
SM3_AN
SM3_AN
19
P+24V
SM3_BP
SM3_BP
20
P+24V
SM3_BN
SM3_BN
21
P+24V
SM4_AP
SM4_AP
22
P+24V
SM4_AN
SM4_AN
23
P+24V
SM4_BP
SM4_BP
24
P+24V
SM4_BN
SM4_BN
25
PGND
SM5_AP
SM5_AP
26
PGND
SM5_AN
SM5_AN
27
PGND
SM5_BP
SM5_BP
5-13
Hardware System 28
PGND
SM5_BN
SM5_BN
29
PGND
SM6_AP
SM6_AP
30
PGND
SM6_AN
SM6_AN
31
PGND
SM6_BP
SM6_BP
32
PGND
SM6_BN
SM6_BN
Table 5-19 Definition of PB3 for mother board column A
column B
column C
1
PGND
SM7_AP
SM7_AP
2
PGND
SM7_AN
SM7_AN
3
PGND
SM7_BP
SM7_BP
4
PGND
SM7_BN
SM7_BN
5
PGND
SM8_AP
SM8_AP
6
PGND
SM8_AN
SM8_AN
7
PGND
SM8_BP
SM8_BP
8
PGND
SM8_BN
SM8_BN
9
PGND
HT1_ON
HT1_ON
10
PGND
HT2_ON
HT2_ON
11
PGND
PGND
PGND
12
PGND
PUMP7
PUMP7
13
PGND
PUMP6
PUMP6
14
P+12V
PUMP5
PUMP5
15
P+12V
PUMP4
PUMP4
16
P+12V
PUMP3
PUMP3
17
P+12V
PUMP2
PUMP2
18
P+12V
PUMP1
PUMP1
19
V1
V2
V3
20
V4
V5
V6
21
V7
V8
V9
22
V10
V11
V12
23
V13
V14
V15
24
V16
V17
V18
25
V19
V20
V21
26
V22
V23
V24
27
V25
V26
V27
28
V28
V29
V30
29
V31
V32
V33
30
V34
V35
V36
5-14
Hardware System
31
V37
V38
V39
32
V40
NC
NC
Connector J14 for temperature sensor
Connector type: HEADER WTB 2.5MM DIP1*6 TOP XHSERIES Model: B-6B-XH-A 'JST' Table 5-20 Definition of J14 for mother board Pin
Definition
Description
1
HT1_SA
both ends of thermistor of heater
2
HT1_SB
1
3
HT2_SA
both ends of thermistor of heater
4
HT2_SB
2
5
AMBI_SA
both
6
AMBI_SB
environment temperature
ends
of
thermistor
of
Connector J15 for sensors of volumetric board and pressure control board
Connector type: HEADER WTB 2MM DIP1*12 TOP PHSERIES Model: SIP12TD-B12B-PH-K 'JST' Table 5-21 Definition of J15 for mother board Pin
Definition
Description
1
P+12V
2
PGND
3
DGND
4
POSI_PRESS
Pressure chamber (pressure) signal
5
NEGA_PRESS
Vacuum chamber (vacuum) signal
6
DGND
7
#VM_ON
Volumetric optics is on, effective low
8
#RBC_START
RBC volume measurement starts, effective low
9
#RBC_STOP
RBC volume measurement stops, effective low
10
#WBC_START
WBC volume measurement starts, effective low
11
#WBC_STOP
WBC volume measurement stops, effective low
12
D+5V
Connector J16 for liquid level sensor
5-15
Hardware System Connector type: HEADER WTB 2MM DIP2*17 TOP Model: B34B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN) 'JST' Table 5-22 Definition of J16 for mother board Pin
Definition
Description
1
D+5V
2
#LIQ1
LIQ1status, effective low
3
#LIQ2
LIQ 2 status, effective low
4
#LIQ3
LIQ 3 status, effective low
5
#LIQ4
LIQ 4 status, effective low
6
#LIQ5
LIQ 5 status, effective low
7
#LS_ON
Control signal for liquid level board
8
GND
9
NC
10
NC
11
#LIQ6
12
GND
13
#LYSE_SENSOR
LIQ 6 status, effective low LYSE level sensor, status, i, effective low
14
GND
15
#WASTE_SENSOR
Waste level sensor status, effective low
16
GND
17
NC
18
NC
19
OP17_CTRL
Optics 17 control
20
OP17_STS
Optics 17 status
21
GND
22
GND
23
OP18_CTRL
Optics 18 control
24
OP18_STS
Optics 18 status
25
GND
26
GND
27
OP19_CTRL
Optics 19 control
28
OP19_STS
Optics 19 status
29
GND
30
GND
31
OP20_CTRL
Optics 20 control
32
OP20_STS
Optics 20 status
5-16
Hardware System
33
GND
34
GND
Connector J18, J19, J20 for optics of position sensor
Position sensor has three connectors, all using double-row and 2mm connectors. Connector type: HEADER WTB 2.0MM DIP2*12 TOP Model: B24B-PHDSS-B (LF) (SN) 'JST' Table 5-23 Definition of J18 for mother board Pin
Definition
Description
1
OP1_CTRL
Optics 1 drive
2
OP1_STS
Optics 1 status
3,4
DGND
5
OP2_CTRL
Optics 2 drive
6
OP2_STS
Optics 2 status
7,8
DGND
9
OP3_CTRL
Optics 3 drive
10
OP3_STS
Optics 3 status
11,12
DGND
13
OP4_CTRL
Optics 4 control
14
OP4_STS
Optics 4 status
15,16
DGND
17
OP5_CTRL
Optics 5 drive
18
OP5_STS
Optics 5 status
19,20
DGND
21
OP6_CTRL
Optics 6 drive
22
OP6_STS
Optics 6 status
23,24
DGND
Table 5-24 Definition of J19 for mother board Pin
Definition
Description
1
OP7_CTRL
Optics 7 drive
2
OP7_STS
Optics 7 status
3,4
DGND
5
OP8_CTRL
Optics 8 drive
6
OP8_STS
Optics 8 status
7,8
DGND
9
OP9_CTRL
Optics 9 drive
10
OP9_STS
Optics 9 status 5-17
Hardware System 11,12
DGND
13
OP10_CTRL
Optics 10 drive
14
OP10_STS
Optics 10 status
15,16
DGND
17
OP11_CTRL
Optics 11 drive
18
OP11_STS
Optics 11 status
19,20
DGND
21
OP12_CTRL
Optics 12 drive
22
OP12_STS
Optics 12 status
23,24
DGND
Table 5-25 Definition of J20 for mother board Pin
Definition
Description
1
OP13_CTRL
Optics 13 drive
2
OP13_STS
Optics 13 status
3,4
DGND
5
OP14_CTRL
Optics 14 drive
6
OP14_STS
Optics 14 status
7,8
DGND
9
OP15_CTRL
Optics 15 drive
10
OP15_STS
Optics 15 status
11,12
DGND
13
OP16_CTRL
Optics 16
14
OP16_STS
Optics 16 status
15,16
DGND
17-24
NC
Connector J21 (reserved) for DC mix motor
Connector type: HEADER WTB 2MM DIP1*3
TOP PHSERIES
Model: B3B-PH-K 'JST' Table 5-26 Definition of J21 for mother board Pin
Definition
1
DM_ON
2
NC
3
DGND
Description DC Motor drive
Connector J22, J23, J24, J25 for stepping motors
Each connector connects two motors. Connector type: HEADER WTB 2.54MM DIP1*8 TOP XHSERIES 5-18
Hardware System Model: B-8B-XH-A 'JST' 2.54MM Table 5-27 Definition of J22 for mother board Pin
Definition
Description
1
SM1_AP
A-phase coil drive , motor 1
2
SM1_AN
A-phase coil drive , motor 1
3
SM1-BP
B-phase coil drive , motor 1
4
SM1_BN
B-phase coil drive , motor 1
5
SM2_AP
A-phase coil drive , motor 2
6
SM2_AN
A-phase coil drive , motor 2
7
SM2-BP
B-phase coil drive , motor 2
8
SM2_BN
B-phase coil drive , motor 2
Table 5-28 Definition of J23 for mother board Pin
Definition
Description
1
SM3_AP
A-phase coil drive , motor 3
2
SM3_AN
A-phase coil drive , motor 3
3
SM3-BP
B-phase coil drive , motor 3
4
SM3_BN
B-phase coil drive , motor 3
5
SM4_AP
A-phase coil drive , motor 4
6
SM4_AN
A-phase coil drive , motor 4
7
SM4-BP
B-phase coil drive , motor 4
8
SM4_BN
B-phase coil drive , motor 4
Table 5-29 Definition of J24 for mother board Pin
Definition
Description
1
SM5_AP
A-phase coil drive , motor 5
2
SM5_AN
A-phase coil drive , motor 5
3
SM5-BP
B-phase coil drive , motor 5
4
SM5-BN
B-phase coil drive , motor 5
5
SM6_AP
A-phase coil drive , motor 6
6
SM6_AN
A-phase coil drive , motor 6
7
SM6-BP
B-phase coil drive , motor 6
8
SM6_BN
B-phase coil drive , motor 6
Table 5-30 Definition of J25 for mother board Pin 1
Definition SM7_AP
Description A-phase coil drive , motor 7 5-19
Hardware System
2
SM7_AN
A-phase coil drive , motor 7
3
SM7-BP
B-phase coil drive , motor 7
4
SM7_BN
B-phase coil drive , motor 7
5
SM8_AP
A-phase coil drive , motor 8
6
SM8_AN
A-phase coil drive , motor 8
7
SM8-BP
B-phase coil drive , motor 8
8
SM8_BN
B-phase coil drive , motor 8
Connector J27, J28 for heaters
Connector type: HEADER WTB 2.5MM DIP1*4 TOP XHSERIES Model: B-4B-XH-A 'JST' Table 5-31 Definition of J27 for mother board Pin
Definition
1
P+24V
2
HT1_ON
3,4
Description Heater 1 drive Heater 1 control
Table 5-32 Definition of J28 for mother board Pin
Definition
1
P+24V
2
HT2_ON
3,4
Description Heater 2 drive Heater 2 control
Connector J29, J30, J31, J32, J33 for pumps and valves
Valves and pumps have five double-row PH-model connectors. Connector type: HEADER WTB 2MM DIP2*10 TOP PHDSERIES Model: B20B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN) Table 5-33 Definition of J29 for mother board Pin
Definition
1~6
NC
7
PUMP7
8
P+12V
9
PUMP6
10
P+12V
11
PUMP5
12
P+12V
13
PUMP4
Description Pump 7 drive Pump 6 drive Pump 5 drive Pump 4 drive
5-20
Hardware System 14
P+12V
15
PUMP3
16
P+12V
17
PUMP2
18
P+12V
19
PUMP1
20
P+12V
Pump 3 drive Pump 2 drive Pump 1 drive
Table 5-34 Definition of J30 for mother board Pin
Definition
1
V1
2
P+12V
3
V2
4
P+12V
5
V3
6
P+12V
7
V4
8
P+12V
9
V5
10
P+12V
11
V6
12
P+12V
13
V7
14
P+12V
15
V8
16
P+12V
17
V9
18
P+12V
19
V10
20
P+12V
Description Valve 1 drive Valve 2 drive Valve 3 drive Valve 4 drive Valve 5 drive Valve 6 drive Valve 7 drive Valve 8 drive Valve 9 drive Valve 10 drive
Table 5-35 Definition of J31 for mother board Pin
Definition
1
V11
2
P+12V
3
V12
4
P+12V
5
V13
Description Valve 11 drive Valve 12 drive Valve 13 drive 5-21
Hardware System 6
P+12V
7
V14
8
P+12V
9
V15
10
P+12V
11
V16
12
P+12V
13
V17
14
P+12V
15
V18
16
P+12V
17
V19
18
P+12V
19
V20
20
P+12V
Valve 14 drive Valve 15 drive Valve 16 drive Valve 17 drive Valve 18 drive Valve 19 drive Valve 20 drive
Table 5-36 Definition of J32 for mother board Pin
Definition
1
V21
2
P+12V
3
V22
4
P+12V
5
V23
6
P+12V
7
V24
8
P+12V
9
V25
10
P+12V
11
V26
12
P+12V
13
V27
14
P+12V
15
V28
16
P+12V
17
V29
18
P+12V
19
V30
20
P+12V
Description Valve 21 drive Valve 22 drive Valve 23 drive Valve 24 drive Valve 25 drive Valve 26 drive Valve 27 drive Valve 28 drive Valve 29 drive Valve 30 drive
5-22
Hardware System Table 5-37 Definition of J33 for mother board Pin
Definition
1
V31
2
P+12V
3
V32
4
P+12V
5
V33
6
P+12V
7
V34
8
P+12V
9
V35
10
P+12V
11
V36
12
P+12V
13
V37
14
P+12V
15
V38
16
P+12V
17
V39
18
P+12V
19
V40
20
P+12V
Description Valve 31 drive Valve 32 drive Valve 33 drive Valve 34 drive Valve 35 drive Valve 36 drive Valve 37 drive Valve 38 drive Valve 39 drive Valve 40 drive
Connector J37 for D+5V
Connector type: HEADER WTB 4.2MM DIP2*2 TOP 5566SERIES Model: 3928-1043 Table 5-38 Definition of J37 for mother board Pin
Definition
1
D+5V
2
D+5V
3
DGND
4
DGND
Connector J35 for P+12V, P+24V
Connector type: HEADER WTB 4.2MM DIP2X5 TOP 5566SERIES Model: 39-31-0108
5-23
Hardware System Table 5-39 Definition of J35 for mother board Pin
Definition
1
P+24V
2
P+24V
3
P+24V
4
P+12V
5
P+12V
6
PGND
7
PGND
8
PGND
9
PGND
10
PGND
Connector J34 for fan power
Connector type: HEADER WTB 2.5MM DIP1*2 TOP XHSERIES Model: B-2B-XH-A 'JST'
Table 5-40 Definition of J34 for mother board Pin
Definition
1
P+12V
2
PGND
Connector J36 for power (auto-sampler board)
Connector type: HEADER WTB 4.2MM DIP2*3 TOP 5566SERIES Model: 3928-1063 Table 5-41 Definition of J36 for mother board Pin
Definition
1
D+5V
2
P+12V
3
P+24V
4
DGND
5
PGND
6
PGND
5-24
Hardware System
Assembly drawing
Figure 5-3 Assembly drawing of the mother board
5-25
Hardware System
5.1.3 Adjustment and Test Points There are no test points designed specially for mother board. To test certain power or signal, use the touch points of connectors directly. On the mother board with the Debug Serial Communication Port (DSCP) configured, the configuration of COM port is implemented by several connection matrices. See the following introduction for connection method. By adjusting JP1 to JP3, the J2 COM port can support the following 5 debugging modes (all via PC COM port). 1. Data board COM 3: debugging the data board function 2. Data board COM 0: debugging the data board’s function of controlling the drive board 3. Drive board COM: debugging the drive board function 4. Data board COM 1: debugging the data board’s function of controlling the atuo-sampler board 5. Auto-sampler board COM: debugging the function of auto-sampler board Notice: In case of functions 2 or 3 (4 and 5 are the same), do not connect the drive board and the data board at the same time. Namely, in case of function 2, do not connect the drive board, and in case of function 3, do not connect the data board. JP1 and JP2 respectively connect UART1, 3, 0 to the input of the RS-232 transceiver. JP1 can also be used for selecting the UART1 COM direction. JP2 connects interface signals of the data board or the auto-sampler board to the RS-422 transceiver. (U2 in Figure 6) See Table 5-42 for configuration details. Table 5-42 Configuration details Debugging COM port Data board UART0
JP1
JP2
Put jumpers on pins 1-2 and
No jumpers
3-4, Drive board COM
Put jumpers on
pins 5-6
No jumpers
and 7-8 Data board UART1
Put jumpers on pins 9-10
Put
and 11-12.
1-2,,3-4,,5-6, and,7-8..
Put jumpers on pins 9-10
Put
COM
and 11-12.
9-10,11-12,13-14,and 15-16.
Data board UART3
Put jumpers on pins 13-14
No jumpers.
Auto-sampler
board
jumpers jumpers
on on
pins pins
and 15-16. A male or female receptacle can be installed at J2. Four cable types can be supported, as shown in the following table.
5-26
Hardware System Table 5-43 COM port receptacle and cable selection Connector
cable Serial
DB9
male
cable
JP3
with
female
3-4, 7-8, 13-14, 15-16
connectors on both ends,
receptacle
signals not intercrossed
(straight or 90°
Serial
installation)
connectors on both ends,
cable
with
female
3-4, 7-8, 9-10, 11-12
signals intercrossed; namely the COM cable Serial cable with a female DB9
female
1-2, 5-6, 13-14, 15-16
connector on one end and a
receptacle
male connector on the other
(straight or 90°
end, signals not intercross;
installation)
namely the COM extension cable Serial cable with a female
1-2, 5-6, 9-10, 11-12
connector on one end and a male connector on the other end, signals intercross JP4 needs to be configured as shown in the following table when the MCU JTAG of the drive board or the auto-sampler board is to be connected to J3. Table 5-44 Connection matrix of multi-functional JTAG port JTAG function Connect MCU JTAG of
JP4 No jumpers
auto-sampler board Connect MCU JTAG of
Put jumpers on pins 1-2, 3-4, 5-6 and
drive board
7-8.
5.1.4 Removal Purpose The mother board is unlikely to be damaged. But in case you need to replace it, following the steps below to do so.
Tools 107 cross-headed screwdriver 107 flat-headed screwdriver 5-27
Hardware System
Removal Follow these two procedures to disassemble the mother board:
To remove the mother board from the analyzer:
1. Power off the analyzer. 2. Unplug the power cable and the LAN cable from the back of the analyzer. 3. Remove the top cover and front cover of the analyzer 4. Remove the data board and the drive board. 5. Disconnect all cables from the mother board. 6. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the four M4X8 small panhead screws fixing the bracket. 7. Pull the bracket to remove it.
Figure 5-4 Disassembly diagram of the mother board-1 1 ―――Bracket
2 ―――Mother board
3 ―――M4X8 panhead screw
To disassemble the mother board:
1. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the fourteen M3X6 cross-headed panhead screws on the mother board. 2. Pull the mother board towards the panel by a certain distance, remove the LAN port connector from the metal plate and take out the mother board.
5-28
Hardware System
Figure 5-5 Disassembly diagram of the mother board-2 1 ―――Bracket
2 ―――Mother board
3―――M3X6 cross-headed panhead screws
Installation Install the mother board as per the above-mentioned procedures in the reverse order. Note: Since the mother board has many connectors, pay attention to the number indicated on the connector to avoid wrong connection. The design of the mother board has included certain error-proof measures. Generally speaking, wrong connection will not lead to safety issues, yet the whole unit cannot function properly
Verification 1. Power on the analyzer, the fan at the back of the analyzer should run normally. Use a multimeter to measure the voltage of D+5V, P+12V, P+24V, A+/-12V, AC120V, and all measurements should be within normal ranges. 2. Power indicators of the boards are on, showing that the mother board is functioning correctly.
5.1.5 Troubleshooting Since the function of the mother board is to realize power distribution and centralized wiring, a failure in the mother board usually takes the form of hardware system failure.
5-29
Hardware System Table 5-45 Troubleshooting Failure Abnormal
Cause voltage
detected
cable
not
connected
Recommended Action properly
to
power
connector
Check connectors J12, J13, J35, J37; If the connection is normal, use a multimeter to check if the voltage of each power source indicated on the mother board is correct.
Fan not running.
Fan damaged or no power
Check connector J34;
supply
Check the P12V indicator on the drive board
Communication failure
Connector J4 abnormal..
Check connector J4
of auto-sampler board
Connector J36 abnormal..
Check connector J36
Pressure
Connector J15 abnormal
Check connector J15
Volumetric abnormal
Connector J15 abnormal
Check connector J15
Liquid level inspection
Connector J16 abnormal
Check connector J16
Connector J17 abnormal
Check connector J7
Pre-amp board has no
Connectors J9 and J10
Check connectors J9 and J10
power
abnormal
control
abnormal
abnormal, misinform Laser not light or laser current
detected
abnormal or
work
abnormally. Motor not active
Motor
drive
cable
not
properly connected . Valve not active
Valve
drive
cable
and 25 not
properly connected. Pump not active
Pump
drive
cable
Check connectors J22,J23,J24, Check connectors J30,J31,J32 and J33
not
Check connector J29
not
Check connector J14
properly connected Temperature fails.
control
Temperature
sensor
properly connected.
5-30
Hardware System
5.2 Data board 5.2.1 Introduction The “data” function of the data board consists of two aspects: analog part and digital part. The analog part is responsible for obtaining, amplifying, and conditioning sensor signals and converting the analog signals into digital signals. The digital part processes digital signals and uploads them to the PC as well as provides the platform for the built-in software and the access interface.
5.2.2 Board composition Function The analog part:
Conditioning and converting power
Monitoring voltage (including power voltage, WBC aperture voltage, RBC aperture voltage and FS background voltage, also monitoring laser drive current and AD working status, etc.)
Collecting and conditioning WBC/RBC volume signals
Detecting and amplifying HGB signals
Conditioning WBC DIFF signals
Driving constant-current supply
Controlling and setting amplification factors for all channels
Zapping apertures
AD conversion
The digital part:
Providing a platform for software operating
Controlling interfaces for the indicator board and the key board
Providing communication interfaces for the autoloader board and the drive board
Providing communication interfaces for PC
Controlling and monitoring interfaces for the volumetric board and the laser board
Processing digital signals and identifying pulse
Block diagram
5-31
Hardware System
Figure 5-6 Data board circuit A±12V、AC120V Power for analog circuits
Analog power filter module
signal monitoring of laser current driver Laser driver
Gain control RBC/PLT sensor
RBC/PLT amplification
RBC／PLT RBC/PLT aperture Constant current source /zapping control
Constant current source/zapping control module of RBC/PLT hole
Monitoring module Gain control WBC sensor
WBC WBC aperture
WBC amplification
Constant current source /burn control
Constant current source/zapping control module of WBC hole HGB
Digital circuits of data board
Gain control HGB sensor
HGB amplification
HGB
Driver control HGB led constant current driver A/D module Gain control SS preamplification board
SS amplification
FS preamplification board
FS amplification
FS Gain control
SS preamplification board
SF amplification
Gain control
SS FS base currrent
SF
Figure 5-7 Functions of analog part on data board
5-32
Hardware System
Figure 5-8 Functions of digital part on data board
Description
The analog part:
Conditioning and converting voltages
The A±12V and AC120V analog power sent from the mother board are conditioned or converted to be the required voltages for the board. The AC120V is used for zapping apertures.
Monitoring voltage
The voltage of A±12V power and VCONST, WBC aperture voltage, RBC aperture voltage, FS blank voltage, laser drive current and AD working status are all monitored via AD.
Collecting and amplifying WBC/RBC volume signals
WBC/RBC volume signals are collected and conditioned, and then sent to the AD converter.
Detecting and amplifying HGB signals
The HGB current signals are converted into voltage signals through colorimetric method, then after conditioning, they are sent to the AD converter.
Conditioning WBC DIFF signals
The WBC DIFF signals （including FS, SS and SF signal; SF signal reserved ）are first collected and conditioned, and then sent to the AD converter.
Driving constant-current supply
The data board provides the constant current for the electrodes of the WBC bath and the RBC/PLT bath and the HGB light.
Controlling setting amplification factors for all channels
5-33
Hardware System The zapping voltage on-off, constant current supply/zapping switch and HGB light on-off are controlled by the GPIO interface of CPU. The amplification factors of WBC DIFF, WBC, RBC/PLT and HGB signal channels are set by the FPGA as required.
Zapping aperture
If the analyzer has been running for a certain period or the WBC/RBC bath aperture clogs, the zapping function shall be performed to clean up the aperature by high temperature.
A／D conversion
The cell signals (WBC, RBC, PLT and WBC DIFF signals), voltage monitoring signals and HGB signals are converted into digital signals, and then sent to FPGA for further processing. The digital part:
Providing a platform for operating system and application software
CPU： MCF5474, 266MHz； DDR：128M, 133MHz； FLASH：16Mx16bit
Communicating with the TTL port of the driver board
Sending control command to the driver board and receiving its response. Baud rate: 38400bps Data bit: 8bit Stop bit: 1bit Start bit: 1bit Parity: even
Communicating with the 422 port of the autoloader board
Sending control command to the autoloader board via serial port and receiving its response. Baud rate: 38400bps Data bit: 8bit Stop bit: 1bit Start bit: 1bit Parity: even
The IO port for the driver board and autoloader board upgrading
By simulating the JTAG sequence through the CPU IO port, the driver board and the autoloader board can be upgraded respectively.
Interface for the indicator board
The status indicator and the buzzer on the indicator board are controlled by the CPU IO port.
Interface for the volumetric board
Enabling the volumetric board and receiving its detecting signals
Interface for the laser control board
Enabling the laser control board and detecting laser diode current
Key input interface
Receiving the key events (including the aspiration key and the keypad). 5-34
Hardware System
Status detection interface
Detecting the open/closed status of the side door and laser shielding box
Analog signal input interface
Receiving the analog signals from the pre-amplification board and the aperture electrodes
10M／100M network interface
The network interface is introduced by the mother board and connected to PC by the cross network cable, and capable of program downloading and data transmission, etc.
BDM debug interface
The BDM interface of CPU, which is used for detecting hardware, downloading program and writing the FLASH, is not available for customers.
JTAG interface of FPGA
It debugs FPGA and downloads FPGA program. It is not available for customers.
Interface definition The data board is a plug-in board. It provides 9 connectors: the connectors for aperture electrodes, the connector to connect the digital part to the mother board, the connector to connect the analog part to the mother board, the connectors for debugging and the reserved connectors. See Figure 5-9 for the layout of the data board. See the following table for the function of each connector. Table 5-46 Interfaces of data board Connector J1 J2 J3 J7
Number of
Function Connects
the
RBC/PLT
Note
pins aperture
electrode Connects the WBC aperture electrode Connects the digital part to the mother board Connects the analog part to the mother board
3 3 96 96
/ / / /
J8
JTAG interface of FPGA
10
/
J9
Reserved
20
/
J10
Reserved
40
/
J11
Reserved
14
/
J13
BDM interface of CPU
26
/
The layout of interfaces is shown in the figure below:
5-35
Hardware System
Figure 5-9 Interfaces layout of data board
Definition of J1
J1 is the signal interface of RBC/PLT. Table 5-47 Definition of J1 Pin
Name
Note
1
SHELL
Shielding ground
2
RHOLE_A
RBC/PLT signals
3
RHOLE_B
RBC analog ground
Definition of J2
J2 is the signal interface of WBC. Table 5-48 Definition of J2 Pin
Name
Note
1
WHOLE _B
WBC analog ground
2
WHOLE_A
WBC signals
3
SHELL
Shielding ground
Definition of J3
J3 is the signal interface for the digital part of data board and mother board, and is European 96 pin connector. Table 5-49 Definition of J3 5-36
Hardware System Pin
Definition
A1
D+5V
Function
Pin
Definition
Power supply
B17
JTAG_TCK_
Function JTAG clock of autoloader board
AS A2 A3 A4 A5
D+5V D+5V D+5V D+5V
Power supply
B18
Power supply
B19
Power supply
B20
Power supply
B21
JTAG_TO_A
JTAG
sending
of
autoloader
S
board
JTAG_FROM
JTAG receiving of autoloader
_AS
board
UART1_TO_
Reserved
DAT+
sending
UART1_TO_
Reserved
DAT-
sending
debug
serial
port
debug
serial
port
A6
DGND
Signal ground
B22
DGND
Signal ground
A7
DGND
Signal ground
B23
DGND
Signal ground
A8
DGND
Signal ground
B24
DGND
Signal ground
A9
DGND
Signal ground
B25
#VMCTRL
Volumetric board enabling
A10
DGND
Signal ground
B26
#RBC_STAR
Start RBC volume metering
T A11
DGND
Signal ground
B27
#RBC_STOP
Stop RBC volume metering
A12
TP_TX+
Positive sending
B28
#WBC_STAR
Start WBC volume metering
terminal
of
T
network A13
TP_TX-
Negative sending terminal
B29
#RBC_STOP
Stop WBC volume metering
of
network A14
DGND
Signal ground
B30
DGND
Signal ground
A15
DGND
Signal ground
B31
#LASER_CT
Laser board enabling
RL A16
JTAG_TM
JTAG
S
signal
A17
JTAG_TCK
A18
B32
DGND
Signal ground
JTAG clock signal
C1
D+5V
Power supply
JTAG_TO_
JTAG sending of
C2
D+5V
Power supply
DRV
drive board
JTAG_TO_
JTAG receiving of
C3
D+5V
Power supply
DAT
drive board
A20
DGND
Signal ground
C4
D+5V
Power supply
A21
DGND
Signal ground
C5
D+5V
Power supply
A22
UART0_T
Serial
C6
DGND
Signal ground
O_DRV
sending of drive
A19
mode
port
board
5-37
Hardware System A23
UART0_T
Serial
port
O_DAT
receiving of drive
C7
DGND
Signal ground
board A24
DGND
Signal ground
C8
DGND
Signal ground
A25
DGND
Signal ground
C9
DGND
Signal ground
A26
DGND
Signal ground
C10
DGND
Signal ground
A27
DGND
Signal ground
C11
DGND
Signal ground
A28
DGND
Signal ground
C12
TP_RX+
Positive receiving terminal of network
A29
DGND
Signal ground
C13
TP_RX-
Negative receiving terminal of network
A30
DGND
Signal ground
C14
DGND
Signal ground
A31
DGND
Signal ground
C15
DGND
Signal ground
A32
DGND
Signal ground
C16
UART3_TO_
PC communication serial port
PC
sending
UART3_TO_
PC communication serial port
DAT
receiving
B1
D+5V
Power supply
C17
B2
D+5V
Power supply
C18
DGND
Signal ground
B3
D+5V
Power supply
C19
DGND
Signal ground
B4
D+5V
Power supply
C20
UART1_TO_
autoloader
AS+
sending
UART1_TO_
autoloader
AS-
receiving
B5
D+5V
Power supply
C21
board
serial
port
board
serial
port
B6
DGND
Signal ground
C22
DGND
Signal ground
B7
DGND
Signal ground
C23
DGND
Signal ground
B8
DGND
Signal ground
C24
＃
Aspiration key control input
SUCK_KEY B9
DGND
Signal ground
C25
DGND
Signal ground
B10
DGND
Signal ground
C26
＃BUZ
Buzzer control output
B11
DGND
Signal ground
C27
#COUNT_KE
Aspirate key control input
Y B12
PWFBOUT
Network
power
C28
FAULT_J
Indicator control output (red)
supply feedback B13
DGND
Signal ground
C29
READY_J
Indicator control output (green)
B14
DGND
Signal ground
C30
OPTI_DOOR
Laser shielding box monitoring input
B15 B16
DGND JTAG_TM
Signal ground JTAG
mode
C31 of
C32
#RIGHT_DO
Right
OR
input
#INSERT_KE
Compartment door open key
5-38
door
status
monitoring
Hardware System S_AS
autoloader board
Y
control input
Definition of J7
J7 is the signal interface for the analog part of data board and mother board, and is European 96 pin plug. Table 5-50 Definition of J7 Pin
Name
Note
Pin
Name
Note
A1
AGND
Analog ground
B17
HGB_IN
HGB signals input
A2
AGND
Analog ground
B18
AGND
Analog ground
A3
AGND
Analog ground
B19
HGB+
HGB
light
drive
positive
drive
negative
electrode A4
AGND
Analog ground
B20
HGB-
HGB
light
electrode A5
AGND
Analog ground
B21
A-12V
-12V power supply
A6
AGND
Analog ground
B22
A-12V
-12V power supply
A7
AGND
Analog ground
B23
A+12V
+12V power supply
A8
AGND
Analog ground
B24
A+12V
+12V power supply
A9
AGND
Analog ground
B25
A+12V
+12V power supply
A10
AGND
Analog ground
B26
NC
/
A11
AGND
Analog ground
B27
NC
/
A12
AGND
Analog ground
B28
NC
/
A13
AGND
Analog ground
B29
NC
/
A14
AGND
Analog ground
B30
AC120V_
Zapping voltage input
B A15
AGND
Analog ground
B31
NC
/
A16
AGND
Analog ground
B32
NC
/
A17
AGND
Analog ground
C1
AGND
Analog ground
A18
AGND
Analog ground
C2
AGND
Analog ground
A19
AGND
Analog ground
C3
AGND
Analog ground
A20
AGND
Analog ground
C4
AGND
Analog ground
A21
AGND
Analog ground
C5
AGND
Analog ground
A22
AGND
Analog ground
C6
AGND
Analog ground
A23
AGND
Analog ground
C7
AGND
Analog ground
A24
AGND
Analog ground
C8
AGND
Analog ground
A25
AGND
Analog ground
C9
AGND
Analog ground
A26
NC
/
C10
AGND
Analog ground
A27
NC
/
C11
AGND
Analog ground
A28
NC
/
C12
AGND
Analog ground
5-39
Hardware System A29
NC
/
C13
AGND
Analog ground
A30
NC
/
C14
AGND
Analog ground
A31
NC
/
C15
AGND
Analog ground
A32
AC120V_
Zapping voltage input
C16
AGND
Analog ground
C17
AGND
Analog ground
C18
AGND
Analog ground
A B1
AGND
Analog ground
B2
LASER_I
Laser
N
monitoring input
B3
AGND
Analog ground
C19
AGND
Analog ground
B4
AGND
Analog ground
C20
AGND
Analog ground
B5
AGND
Analog ground
C21
A-12V
-12V power supply
B6
AGND
Analog ground
C22
A-12V
-12V power supply
B7
AGND
Analog ground
C23
A+12V
+12V power supply
B8
AGND
Analog ground
C24
A+12V
+12V power supply
B9
AGND
Analog ground
C25
A+12V
+12V power supply
B10
AGND
Analog ground
C26
NC
/
B11
FS_IN
FS signals input
C27
NC
/
B12
AGND
Analog ground
C28
NC
/
B13
SS_IN
SS signals input
C29
NC
/
B14
AGND
Analog ground
C30
NC
/
B15
SF_IN
SF signals input
C31
NC
/
B16
AGND
Analog ground
C32
NC
/
current
Definition of J8
J8 is the JTAG interface of FPGA. Table 5-51 Definition of J8 Pin
Name
Note
1
FPGA_TCK
Clock
2
GND
Signal ground
3
FPGA_TDO
Data output
4
VDD
Power supply
5
FPGA_TMS
Testing mode selection
6
VDD
Power supply
7
NC
/
8
NC
/
9
FPGA_TDI
Data input
10
GND
Signal ground
Definition of J9 5-40
Hardware System Reserved. Not available for customers.
Definition of J10
Reserved. Not available for customers..
Definition of J11
Reserved. Not available for customers.
Definition of J13
J11 is the BDM interface of CPU. Table 5-52 Definition of J13 Pin
Definition
Function
1
NC
/
2
BKPT#
Breakpoint setup
3
GND
Signal ground
4
DSCLK
synchronizing clock input
5
GND
Signal ground
6
TCK
Clock input of JATG
7
BDM_RSTI
BDM reset
8
DSI
Serial input
9
VDD
Power supply
10
DSO
Serial output
11
GND
Signal ground
12
PSTDATA7
13
PSTDATA6
14
PSTDATA5
15
PSTDATA4
16
PSTDATA3
17
PSTDATA2
18
PSTDATA1
19
PSTDATA0
20
GND
Signal ground
21
NC
/
22
NC
/
23
GND
Signal ground
24
PSTCLK
Processor clock
25
NC
/
26
MCF_TA#
Transmission response
Configuration data
5-41
Hardware System
Assembly drawing
Figure 5-10 Assembly drawing of data board
5-42
Hardware System
5.2.3 Adjustment and Test Points All the adjustable parameters of analog part are adjusted as per the command of FPGA. Adjust the parameters' settings in the software interface if necessary.
LED function definition Table 5-53 LED function definition No.
Indicator
Function description
1
D17
A-12V power indicator
2
D20
A+12V power indicator
3
D21
A-5V power indicator
4
D22
A+5V power indicator
5
D39
Reserved for software use.
6
D40
Reserved for software use.
7
D41
Reserved for software use.
8
D42
Reserved for software use.
9
D43
Reserved for software use.
10
D44
Network conflict indicator. It turns on when network conflicts.
11
D45
100M network communication indicator. It turns on when enabled.
12
D46
10M network communication indicator. It turns on when enabled.
13
D47
Network connection indicator. It turns on when enabled.
14
D48
Network full-duplex communication indicator. It turns on when enabled.
15
D49
FPGA configuration complete indicator. It turns on when the configuration is done.
16
D51
D+5V power indicator
Function definition of test points Table 5-54 Test points on data board No.
Test point
Signal under test
Function description
1
+12V
AVCC
+12V power supply of analog part
2
-12V
AVSS
-12V power supply of analog part
5-43
Hardware System 3
+5V
AVDD
+5V power supply of analog part
4
-5V
AVEE
-5V power supply of analog part
5
VR_MON
+2.5V
+2.5V power supply of analog part
6
VR_H
+2.5V
+2.5V power supply of analog part
7
+56V
VCONST
8
+12VM
A+12V_MON
+12V power supply monitoring
9
-12VM
A-12V_MON
-12V power supply monitoring
10
+56VM
VCONSTM
11
RHOLE
RHOLE
RBC Aperture Voltage monitoring
12
WHOLE
WHOLE
WBC Aperture Voltage monitoring
13
FSBASE
FSBASE
FS background voltage monitoring
14
LASER
LASER
Laser diode drive current monitoring
15
HGB1
HGB1
HGB channel voltage value after I/V
16
NHGB
#HGBLED
HGB light on-off control
17
HGB
HGB
HGB measurement voltage value
18
NBURN
#BURN
Zapping control
19
PULSE
PULSE
20
FS_IN
FS_IN
FS pre-amplification board output signals
21
FS1
FS1
Adjustable amplified FS signals
22
FS
FS
Analog signals outputted by FS channel
23
SS_IN
SS_IN
SS pre-amplification board output signals
24
SS1
SS1
Adjustable amplified SS signals
25
SS
SS
Analog signals outputted by SS channel
26
SF_IN
SF_IN
SF pre-amplification board output signals
27
SF1
SF1
Adjustable amplified SF signals
28
SF
SF
Analog signals outputted by SF channel
29
NCONST
#CONST
Constant current source control
30
NSEL_R
#SELECT_RBC
31
NSEL_W
#SELECT_WBC
32
RBC1
RBC1
33
RBC2
RBC2
34
RBC3
RBC3
Drive voltage of constant current source of electrode
Monitor drive voltage of constant current source of electrode
Pulse
control
signals
that
produce
zapping voltage
RBC aperture zapping/constant current selection control WBC aperture zapping/constant current selection control RBC channel output signals of adjustable amplification grade RBC channel output signals of direct current restoring grade RBC channel output signals of low-pass
5-44
Hardware System filter grade 35
RBC
RBC
RBC channel signals of output grade
36
PLT1
PLT1
37
PLT2
PLT2
38
PLT
PLT
39
WBC1
WBC1
40
WBC2
WBC2
41
WBC3
WBC3
42
WBC
WBC
WBC channel signals of output grade
43
HCLK
HCLK
HGB and clock of monitoring voltage
44
HGND
HGND
Analog ground
45
RBCF
RBCF
Signals inputted into AD from RBC
46
VR_R
VR_R
AD reference voltage of RBC
47
RAGND
RAGND
Analog ground
48
RCLK
RCLK
AD clock signals of RBC
49
WBCF
WBCF
Signals inputted into AD from WBC
50
VR_W
VR_W
AD reference voltage of WBC
51
WAGND
WAGND
Analog ground
52
WCLK
WCLK
AD clock signals of WBC
53
PLTF
PLTF
Signals inputted into AD from PLT
54
VR_P
VR_P
AD reference voltage of PLT
55
PAGND
PAGND
Analog ground
56
PCLK
PCLK
AD clock signals of PLT
57
MCLK
MCLK
AD clock of monitoring voltage
58
FSF
FSF
AD input from FS
59
FSCLK
FSCLK
AD clock signals of FS
60
SSF
SSF
AD input from SS
61
SSCLK
SSCLK
AD clock signals of SS
62
SFF
SFF
AD input from SF
63
SFCLK
SFCLK
AD clock signals of SF
64
TP8
MCF_FBAD1
Flexbus address data 1 of CPU
65
TP9
MCF_FBAD2
Flexbus address data 2 of CPU
66
TP37
FPGA_DDR_VRF
VREF power of DDR on FPGA, +1.25V
PLT channel output signals of direct current restoring grade PLT channel output signals of low-pass filter grade PLT channel signals of output grade RBC channel output signals of adjustable amplification grade WBC channel output signals of direct current restoring grade WBC channel output signals of low-pass filter grade
5-45
Hardware System 67
TP45
VCC
+5V digital power supply
68
TP46
VDD
+3.3V digital power supply
69
TP47
D_1V5
+1.5V digital power supply
70
TP48
D_1V8
+1.8V digital power supply
71
TP57
D_1V2_FGPA
+1.2V digital power supply
72
TP71
D_2V5
+2.5V digital power supply
73
TP74
#MCF_CS1
Flexbus CS1 of CPU
74
TP75
MCF_R/#W
Flexbus read/write signals of CPU
75
TP76
MCF_FBAD6
Flexbus address data 6 of CPU
76
TP78
D_1V25VTT
VTT power of DDR on CPU, +1.25V
77
TP79
#MCF_CS0
Flexbus CS0 of CPU
78
TP80
FPGA_DDR_2V5
+2.5V DDR power on FPGA
79
TP81
FPGA_DDR_VTT
VTT power of DDR on FPGA, +1.25V
80
TP82
MCF_FBAD5
Flexbus address data 5 of CPU
81
TP83
D_1V25VRF
VREF power of DDR on CPU, +1.25V
82
TP85
MCF_FBAD5
Flexbus address data 4 of CPU
83
TP86
#MCF_OE
Output enabling of Flexbus of CPU
84
TP87
MCF_TS
Address latch indication of Flexbus of
85
TP95
MCF_FBAD3
Flexbus address data 3 of CPU
86
TP96
#MCF_RSTI
Reset input signals of CPU
87
TP101
#MCF_IRQ1
Interrupt input signals 1 of CPU
88
TP102
#MCF_IRQ2
Interrupt input signals 2 of CPU
89
TP103
#MCF_IRQ3
Interrupt input signals 3 of CPU
90
TP104
#MCF_IRQ5
Interrupt input signals 5 of CPU
91
TP105
#MCF_IRQ6
Interrupt input signals 6 of CPU
92
TP106
#MCF_IRQ7
Interrupt input signals 7 of CPU
CPU
AGND, TP10-21, TP38, TP44, TP70, TP73, TP77, TP88, TP90, TP92-94 and TP107-116 are connected to the GND network and usually used as the connecting point of the oscilloscope probe grounded end.
Data board key definition Table 5-55 Key definition No. S12
Function Manually reset the main CPU
5-46
Hardware System
5.2.4 Disassembly and assembly method Purpose Damaged data board needs to be replaced by a new one..
Tools 107 cross-headed screwdriver 107 flat-headed screwdriver
Disassembly Data board disassembly consists of the following two main procedures:
Remove the data board from the main unit:
1. Shut down the analyzer. 2. Remove the left door. 3. Remove the top cover board 4. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two cross-headed bolts (M3X6) from the upper cover of the shielding box, and then remove the upper cover. 5. Disconnect the two power cables connected to the data board. 6. Use your hand or cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two hand-tightened screws from the bracket. 7. Use both of your hands to flip outward the two latches on both sides of the data board, and then draw the data board out.
Figure 5-11 Disassembly diagram of data board-1 1---Upper cover of the shielding box of
2---Cross-recessed panhead screw M3x6
data board
(with washer)
3---Data board
4---Hand-tightened screws
5-47
Hardware System
Further disassembly of the data board
1. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the 5 cross-headed panhead screws (M3X6) from the data board. 2. Remove the data board from the bracket. 3. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the 2 panhead screws (M3X8) and 6 socket cap screws (M3X12) from the lower cover of the shielding box.
Figure 5-12 Disassembly diagram of data board-2 1---Cross-recessed
panhead
screw
2---Data board
M3x6 (with washer) 3---Bracket
4---Lower cover of the shielding box of data board
5---Panhead screw M4X8
6---Socket cap screws M3X12
Assembly Assemble the data board as per the above-mentioned steps in the reverse order.
Verification 1. Power indicators D20, D17, D22, D21 and D51 turns on. 2. Indicator D49 turns on after FPGA initialization. 3. Indicator D47 and D48 turn on and D45 flashes after network is enabled.
5.2.5 Troubleshooting The errors analysis and the corresponding troubleshooting of the analog part on data board 5-48
Hardware System are listed in the following table. Most of the errors can be tested and determined by testing the corresponding test points with a multimeter. A measurement value within the normal range indicates the circuit or component is in good working condition. Otherwise, be sure to find out the particular error according to the certain symptom and remove it accordingly. Table 5-56 Troubleshooting of analog part No. 1
Error 12V
power
supply error
Character
Possible Cause
The voltage of the
Improper
+12V
connection
test
point
cable with
exceeds the range
the mother board
of 12±0.6V; or the
or
ripple
caused
noise
is
greater than 50mV.
Recommended action Reconnect
the
cable
or
change a new cable
disconnection by
a
broken cable Improper
12V
Check whether the proper
power supply sent
power supply is sent by the
by
mother board or the power
the
board
mother or
the
board
power board Inductor
L16
capacitor
or
C111,
Re-solder
or
change
the
component
C95 and C88 are damaged or not properly soldered. 2
-12V
power
supply error
The voltage of the
Improper
-12V
connection
test
point
cable with
exceeds the range
the mother board
of -12±0.6V; or the
or
ripple
caused
noise
is
greater than 50mV.
Reconnect
the
cable
or
change a new cable
disconnection by
a
broken cable Improper
-12V
Check whether the proper
power supply sent
power supply is sent by the
by
mother board or the power
the
board
mother or
the
board
power board Inductor capacitor
L18
or
C112,
C94 and C87 are damaged or not properly soldered
5-49
Re-solder component
or
change
the
Hardware System 3
+5V
power
supply error
The voltage of the
The +5V relating
First ensure the +12V power
+5V
circuit
rosin
supply works normally. Then,
exceeds the range
jointed; the power
check the +5V relating circuit,
of +5±0.25 V
supply’s
re-solder
impedance to the
component.
test
point
is
ground
is
decreased;
or
or
change
the
power chip U14 is damaged 4
-5V
power
supply error
The voltage of the
The -5V relating
First ensure the -12V power
-5V
circuit
rosin
supply works normally. Then,
exceeds the range
jointed; the power
check the -5V relating circuit,
of -5±0.25 V
supply’s
re-solder
impedance to the
component.
test
point
is
ground
is
decreased;
or
or
change
the
power chip U12 is damaged 5
+2.5V reference
The voltage of the
If the +5V (AVDD)
Check the relating circuit;
power
VR_MON or VR_H
power
supply
re-solder
test point exceeds
works
normally,
the
then the problem
supply
error
range
of
2.5±0.125 V
or
change
the
component
occurres probably because
power
chip U45 or U43, and its peripheral components
are
damaged or not properly soldered. 6
+56 current power error
constant
The voltage of the
The boost circuit
Check the chip U72, U70,
drive
VCONST test point
works improperly
U71 and their peripherals for
supply
exceeds the range of 56±3V
any rosin joint or damage The
56V
voltage-regulator diode is damaged or
not
soldered.
5-50
properly
Re-solder component
or
change
the
Hardware System 7
+56V monitoring
The voltage of the
If the +56V power
Check the U39 and relating
voltage error
+56VM test point
supply
components;
exceeds the range
normally, then the
of 1.37±0.2V
problem occurred
works
re-solder
or
change the component
probably because something wrong
is
with
the
monitoring circuit.. 8
+12V monitoring
The voltage of the
The relating circuit
If the +12V power supply
voltage error
+12VM test point
is
properly
works normally, check U40
exceeds the range
soldered;
the
and the relating components,
of 1.8V-2.2V
power
not
supply’s
impendence to the ground
re-solder
or
change
the
component.
is
decreased; Something wrong
is
with
the
power IC or the corresponding AD. 9
-12V monitoring
The voltage of the
The relating circuit
Check U40 and the relating
voltage error
-12VM
is
components,
test
point
not
properly
exceeds the range
soldered;
of 2.2V-2.6V
power
re-solder
or
the
change the component under
supply’s
the circumstance that the
impendence to the
-12V power supply works
ground
normally
is
decreased; Something wrong
is
with
the
power IC or the corresponding AD. 10
RBC
aperture
The value of the
Constant
current
Check whether the constant
voltage
aperture
source
control
current source control signals
monitoring error
exceeds the range
signals abnormal,
are
of 10V-14V
56V
foregoing troubleshooting to
voltage-regulator
remove the error of 56V
diode abnormal or
circuit.
voltage
normal.
See
the
boost circuit error Bath not properly
Check
wired; clogging.
perform
the
procedure 5-51
the
bath
wiring;
unclogging
Hardware System Monitoring
circuit
error
Components the
of
monitoring
circuit
are
Check whether the relating circuit or AD works normally.
not
properly soldered, or
the
corresponding AD works abnormally. 11
WBC
aperture
Same as point 10
Same as point 10
Same as point 10
HGB
HGB value of the
HGB light error or
Check whether HGB light is
background
test point exceeds
the gain
on, or adjust the gain multiple
voltage
the normal range
abnormal
(4.2V-4.8V)
voltage monitoring error 12
of HGB channel The
Check
corresponding AD
corresponding
works abnormally,
normally.
or
the
error
message
is
whether AD
the works
accidentally triggered
by
improper wiring. 13
FS background
The value of the
The flow cell is
Clean the flow cell in time, or
voltage
FSBASE test point
dirty, or something
check whether the U38 and
monitoring error
exceeds the normal
is wrong with the
the corresponding AD chip
range (0-400mv)
corresponding
U44 work normally.
monitoring circuit error. 14
Laser drive
diode
The value of the
Something
current
LASER test point
wrong
exceeds the range
current value sent
laser
of 1.0-3.0V.
by
whether the monitoring value
monitoring error
with the
control board
is
Check whether the cable is
the
properly connected to the
laser
control
and
sent from the laser control board is normal
5-52
board
Hardware System Data
board
Check whether the operation
monitoring circuit
amplifier
error,
corresponding AD chip U44
the
corresponding AD error
U38
and
the
work normally.
or
connection
cable
abnormal 15
RBC
aperture
zapping error
is
Ensuring the wiring of the
the
bath is correct, then check
zapping
voltage
whether the AC120V zapping
supplied
by
the
power of the power board is
power board, or
proper, or check whether the
with the part of the
zapping control signals are
data
effective.
No sound is heard
Something
and no bubbles are
wrong
produced
when
zapping the bath
with
board
that
controls zapping. 16
WBC
aperture
Same as point 15
Same as point 15
Same as point 15
No
No WBC/RBC/PLT
Bath wiring error,
Use a oscilloscope to check
WBC/RBC/PLT
result, or the result
analog
part
whether the analog channel
result
displays “***”
channel error, AD
can output correct signals. If
collection error or
no
algorithm
check the amplification stage
identification error
by stage, and check the AD
zapping error 17
signal
is
detected,,
collection and data uploading as well. 18
WBC/RBC/PLT
WBC/RBC/PLT
Bad
background
background
constant
abnormal
abnormal
shielding,
First ensure the bath and the
current
fluidics work normally, and
source abnormal,
then check the shielding and
analog
grounding,
channel
check
resistor-capacitor
components
components
resistors) of the constant
incorrect abnormal
or
(such
as
current source, or check the resistor-capacitor
and
operation amplifier of the signal conditioning channel.
5-53
Hardware System Table 5-57 Troubleshooting of digital part No. 1
Error System startup failed
Causes and solutions Possible causes: input power supply error, including improper power cord connection, abnormal power supply voltage on each board, flash chip error that causes
the
operating
system
to
fail
to
be
downloaded into DDR SDRAM; DDR SDRAM error that causes the system to fail to operate; Or system clock abnormal. Solutions: press the S12 key to reset the system, and then check whether the error still exists; check whether the power indicator D51 is on; check whether the fuse F4 is broken; use a multimeter to check the voltage of each power supply; use an oscilloscope to check whether the clock crystal oscillator output X2 is normal. 2
Network communication failed
Possible causes: network connection abnormal; using non-standard network cable; network chip damaged, etc. Solutions: directly connect the analyzer and PC with the specified shielding-cross network cable. If nothing is wrong with the network connection and the settings, then check the crystal oscillator X3 output by an oscilloscope. If you doubt the network chip U36 is damaged, replace it with a new one.
3
Abnormal communication with
Possible causes: improper connection; interface chip
UART of autoloader board
U66 damaged. Solutions: check and make sure the connection is proper; check whether the interface signals are normal by an oscilloscope.
4
volumetric board signals, laser
Possible causes: improper connection; interface chip
shielding box status and right
U74 damaged.
door status can not be detected
Solutions: check and make sure the connection is proper;
check
the
interface
signals
by
an
oscilloscope. 5
Abnormal communication with
Possible causes: improper connection; interface chip
UART of drive board
U67 damaged. Solutions: check and make sure the connection is proper;
check
oscilloscope. 5-54
the
interface
signals
by
an
Hardware System 6
Events of Aspirate Key, Count
Possible causes: improper connection; interface chip
Key and Compartment Door
U67 damaged.
Open Key can not be detected,
Solutions: check and make sure the connection is
or the buzzer and indicator on
proper;
the indicator board are out of
oscilloscope.
control.
5-55
check
the
interface
signals
by
an
Hardware System
5.3 Drive board 5.3.1 Introduction The drive board realizes the following functions: 1) driving motors, pumps, valves and heaters etc. 2) detecting such signals as the motor position and liquid levels; 3) collecting the signals of temperature, pressure and voltage etc. for AD conversion.
5.3.2 Board composition Function
Serial communication
Driving stepping motors
Driving valves and pumps
Temperature control
Pressure control
System status detection
Reagent status detection
Block diagram 2-channel temperature measurement 2-channel pressure measurement 3-channel power voltage measurement
DIR
A
MS1
AN
MS2
MOTOR
BN
SLEEP
ALE Temperature Pressure Power Voltage (anolog signal)
B
A3979
STEP HOLD
WR RD
8-channel Step-motor driver module
8
A/D[7:0] Databoard UART
EN
RXD C8051F020 TMS
Databoard JTAG
IN
A[15:8]
TXD
F_INT
CLK
F_NCONFIG
LATCH
NCSO
TDI
EP1C6Q240C8
DATA
CLK
M54972
SV1~SV8 8
40-channel solenoid valve control
DCLK
TDO
ASDO M_SEN
CD74HC14
Pump Heater 6
HOA0880-T51
20-channel motor position sensor detection EPCS1S18N
7-channel high power pump & valve control 2-channel heater control
L-SEN/SWITCH
CD74HC14
Liquid level sensor or sensitive switch
8-channel liquid level sensor & 4-channel sensitive switch detection
Figure 5-13 Block diagram of drive board
5-56
Hardware System
Description
Serial communication
The main control unit of the drive board is a MCU, which has two asynchronous serial communication interfaces (UART). UART0 is used for asynchronous serial communication with the data board. It receives and analyzes control commands sent by the data board, and responds accordingly. Communication parameters: Baud Rate: 38400bps Start bit: 1bit Data bit: 8 bits Stop bit: 1bit Parity: even UART1 is reserved.
Stepping motor driving
The drive board controls stepping motors through an FPGA. After output by the FPGA, the control signal is first sent to isolator 74AHCT245, and then to controller A3979 to drive the motor. The drive board drives 8 stepping motors: the sample syringe motor, the sample injection syringe motor, the sheath syringe motor, the diluent syringe motor, the lyse syringe motor, the horizontal motor and the vertical motor.
Valve and pump driving
The drive board provides the drive control for 40 valves and 7 pumps and actually drives 34 valves, 1 pressure pump and 2 vacuum pumps (also be used as the waste pump). The MCU writes control information of valve SV1-SV40 into the valve buffer of the FGPA. Based on the data, the FPGA outputs valve control signals through the serial-parallel conversion chip M54972. The MCU first sends the control information of PUMP1-PUMP3 to isolator 74AHCT245, and then to the drive chip ULN2068 to control the 3 pumps respectively. Pinch valve SV39 is driven by the PUMP4 channel (it is beyond M54972’s driving capacity).
Temperature Control
The temperature control circuit keeps temperature of the reaction bath (DIFF bath) and the optical system constant. By comparing the temperature measurements and the target values, the MCU turns on/off the heater to control the temperature of each channel. The MC sends heater control signals to isolator 74AHCT245, then to driver FDS6670A to control the two heaters.
Air pressure control
The pressure control circuit controls the pressure of the vacuum chamber and the pressure 5-57
Hardware System chamber. The pressure signals (voltage signals) sent by the volumetric board are measured by the drive board. Through voltage follower LM358, the signals are then sent to the ADC pin of the MCU for AD conversion and corresponding operation. Then, the control signals are output to turn on/off the pressure pump or the vacuum pump, thus, the pressure of each chamber is adjusted.
System status detection
The drive board detects the ambient temperature and the voltage of power supply. The mother board sends the inquiry command to obtain the corresponding system status parameter. Ambient temperature sensor is located on the interface board. After I/V conversion and amplification, the signals outputted by the temperature sensor are sent to the MCU for AD conversion and operation, then the temperature value is obtained. The voltage detection circuit detects all the power supplies (24V, 12V and 5V) on the drive board.
Reagent status detection
The reagent status is detected by the passive float switch. There are totally 8 reagent detection channels on the drive board as designed, and 6 channels of them are in use to detect the following reagents: LEO1, LEO2, LH, cleanser, diluent and waste.
Interface definition
The drive board connects the motherboard via the 3 DIN41612 plugs and 3 DIN41612 receptacles located on the two boards respectively. All the drive-board-relating peripherals (including valves, pumps, heaters, motors and sensors etc.) are connected to the motherboard directly. The connectors’ layout and the corresponding connections are shown in the figure below.
5-58
Hardware System
Liquid level sensor Optical train temperature Reaction pool temperature Ambient temperature
Position sensor JTAG UART Pressure
Valve PUMP Heater 2-channel step-motor
6-channel step-motor +24V
+5V
+12V Base board
PB2 Socket
PB1 Socket
J4
PB3 Socket
J5
Board mounting bracket & guide channel
J3
Socket 96Pin 插座（96Pin）
Driver board J9 J1
J2
J10 J8
Support board
Figure 5-14 Interfaces layout of drive board The functions of the interfaces are listed in the table. Table 5-58 Interfaces on the driver board Connector J1
Number of
Function FPGA
configuration
Note
pins interface
10
(AS mode)
Used
when
FPGA
first
downloading
J2
FPGA Debug Interface
10
J3
Interface with the motherboard
96
J4
Interface with the motherboard
96
J5
Interface with the motherboard
96
Motor control interface
J8
Communication Debug Interface
4
Not used on complete device
J9
MCU Debug Interface
10
J10
Communication Debug Interface
4
Definition of J1
J1 is the FPGA configuration interface (AS mode). 5-59
Not used on complete device Control interface of valves, pumps and heaters Sensor
detection
and
communication interface
Used
when
MCU
first
downloading Not used on complete device
Hardware System Table 5-59 Definition of the interface for FPGA configuration Pin
Name
Pin
Name
1
F_DCLK
2
AGND
3
F_CONFDONE
4
VDD
5
F_CONFIG
6
F_NCE
7
F_DATA
8
F_NCSC
9
F_ASDO
10
GND
Definition of J2
J2 is the FPGA debug interface (JTAG mode). Definition of J3
J3 connects to the PB3 connector of the motherboard, and is the interface used for valves, pumps and heaters control. Table 5-60 Valve/pump interface- Definition of J3 Pin
Definition
Note
1 2 3 4 5 6 PGND
Power ground
12V0
12V power supply
19
SV1
Control signal for Valve 1
20
SV4
Control signal for Valve 4
21
SV7
Control signal for Valve 7
22
SV10
Control signal for Valve 10
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
5-60
Hardware System 23
SV13
Control signal for Valve 13
24
SV16
Control signal for Valve 16
25
SV19
Control signal for Valve 19
26
SV22
Control signal for Valve 22
27
SV25
Control signal for Valve 25
28
SV28
Control signal for Valve 28
29
SV31
Control signal for Valve 31
30
SV34
Control signal for Valve 34
31
SV37
Control signal for Valve 37
32
SV40
Control signal for Valve 40
33
M7-A
34
M7-AN
35
M7-B
36
M7-BN
37
M8-A
38
M8-AN
39
M8-B
40
M8-BN
41
HT1-DRV
Control end of the reaction bath heater
42
HT2-DRV
Control end of the optical system heater
43
PGND
Power ground
44
PUMP7
Control signal for Pump 7
45
PUMP6
Control signal for Pump 6
46
PUMP5
Control signal for Pump 5
47
PUMP4
Control signal for pinch valve V39
48
PUMP3
Control signal for the Vacuum/Waste Pump (P3)
49
PUMP2
Control signal for the Vacuum/Waste Pump (P2)
50
PUMP1
Control signal for pressure pump (P1)
51
Sv2
Control signal for Valve 2
52
SV5
Control signal for Valve 5
53
SV8
Control signal for Valve 8
Connecting end A of A-phase winding of the sample probe X motor (SM 7) Connecting end AN of A-phase winding of the sample probe X motor (SM 7) Connecting end B of B-phase winding of the sample probe X motor (SM 7) Connecting end BN of B-phase winding of the sample probe X motor (SM 7) Connecting end A of A-phase winding of the sample probe Y motor (SM 8) Connecting end AN of A-phase winding of the sample probe Y motor (SM 8) Connecting end B of B-phase winding of the sample probe Y motor (SM 8) Connecting end BN of B-phase winding of the sample probe Y motor (SM 8)
5-61
Hardware System 54
SV11
Control signal for Valve 11
55
SV14
Control signal for Valve 14
56
SV17
Control signal for Valve 17
57
SV20
Control signal for Valve 20
58
SV23
Control signal for Valve 23
59
SV26
Control signal for Valve 26
60
SV29
Control signal for Valve 29
61
SV32
Control signal for Valve 32
62
SV35
Control signal for Valve 35
63
SV38
Control signal for Valve 38
64
NC
Empty
65
M7-A
66
M7-AN
67
M7-B
68
M7-BN
69
M8-A
70
M8-AN
71
M8-B
72
M8-BN
73
HT1-DRV
Control end of the reaction bath heater
74
HT2-DRV
Control end of the optical system heater
75
PGND
Power ground
76
PUMP7
Control signal for Pump 7
77
PUMP6
Control signal for Pump 6
78
PUMP5
Control signal for Pump 5
79
PUMP4
Control signal for pinch valve V39
80
PUMP3
Control signal for the Vacuum/Waste Pump (P3)
81
PUMP2
Control signal for the Vacuum/Waste Pump (P2)
82
PUMP1
Control signal for pressure pump (P1)
83
SV3
Control signal for Valve 3
84
SV6
Control signal for Valve 6
Connecting end A of A-phase winding of the sample probe X motor (SM 7) Connecting end AN of A-phase winding of the sample probe X motor (SM 7) Connecting end B of B-phase winding of the sample probe X motor (SM 7) Connecting end BN of B-phase winding of the sample probe X motor (SM 7) Connecting end A of A-phase winding of the sample probe Y motor (SM 8) Connecting end AN of A-phase winding of the sample probe Y motor (SM 8) Connecting end B of B-phase winding of the sample probe Y motor (SM 8) Connecting end BN of B-phase winding of the sample probe Y motor (SM 8)
5-62
Hardware System 85
SV9
Control signal for Valve 9
86
SV12
Control signal for Valve 12
87
SV15
Control signal for Valve 15
88
SV18
Control signal for Valve 18
89
SV21
Control signal for Valve 21
90
SV24
Control signal for Valve 24
91
SV27
Control signal for Valve 27
92
SV30
Control signal for Valve 30
93
SV33
Control signal for Valve 33
94
SV36
Control signal for Valve 36
95
SV39
96
NC
Control
signal
for
Valve
39
(signal
outputted
but
disconnected with the Valve 39) Empty
Definition of J4
J4 connects to the PB1 connector of the motherboard, and is the interface used for sensor detection and communication. Table 5-61 Sensors/Communication interfaces-Definition of J4 Pin
Name
Note
1
PRTO_T1
Temperature sensor signal end of heater 1 (reaction bath)
2
PRTO_T2
Temperature sensor signal end of heater 2 (optical system)
3
PRESSURE_1ST_A
Input signal of pressure sensor 1 (Pressure)
GND
GND
VCC
5V power supply
17
GND
GND
18
LIQ_SIN1
Input signal of LEO1 lyse liquid-level sensor
19
LIQ_SIN3
Input signal of LH lyse liquid-level sensor
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
5-63
Hardware System 20
LIQ_SIN5
Input signal of liquid-level sensor5 (reserved)
21
LIQ_SIN7
Input signal of waste liquid-level sensor
22
LS_CTRL
Control signal for liquid-level sampling
23
GND
Digital ground
24
VC_SIN17
Sending end power signal of position sensor 17 (reserved)
25
VC_SIN18
Sending end power signal of position sensor 18 (reserved)
26
VC_SIN19
Sending end power signal of position sensor 19 (reserved)
27
VC_SIN20
Sending end power signal of position sensor 20 (reserved)
28
VC_SIN1
29
M_SIN2
30
VC_SIN4
31
M_SIN5
32
VC_SIN7
Sending end power signal of position sensor 7 (reserved)
33
PRTO_REF
Reference end of heater temperature sensor signal
34
PRTO_REF
Reference end of heater temperature sensor signal
35
PRESSURE_2ST_A
Input signal of pressure sensor 2 (vacuum)
GND
Digital ground
VCC
5V power supply
49
GND
Digital ground
50
LIQ_SIN2
Input signal of LEO2 lyse liquid-level sensor
51
LIQ_SIN4
Input signal of cleanser liquid-level sensor
52
LIQ_SIN6
Input signal of diluent liquid-level sensor
53
LIQ_SIN8
Input signal of liquid-level sensor 8 (reserved)
Sending end power signal of sampling syringe initial position sensor (OP1) Receiving end feedback signal of sample injection syringe initial position sensor (OP 2) Sending end power signal of lyse syringe initial position sensor (OP 4) Receiving end feedback signal of diluent syringe initial position sensor (OP 5)
36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
5-64
Hardware System 54 55
GND
Digital ground Receiving end feedback signal of position sensor 17
56
M_SIN17
57
M_SIN18
58
M_SIN19
59
M_SIN20
60
M_SIN1
61
VC_SIN3
62
M_SIN4
63
VC_SIN6
64
M_SIN7
Receiving end feedback signal of position sensor 7 (reserved)
65
AMBINET_T_A
Input signal of ambient temperature sensor
GND
Digital ground
VCC
5V power supply
81
GND
Digital ground
82
TMS
TMS signal of JTAG interface
83
TCK
Clock signal of JTAG interface
84
TDI
Data input pin of JTAG interface
(reserved) Receiving end feedback signal of position sensor 18 (reserved) Receiving end feedback signal of position sensor 19 (reserved) Receiving end feedback signal of position sensor 20 (reserved) Receiving end feedback signal of sampling syringe initial position sensor (OP 1) Sending end power signal of sheath syringe initial position sensor (OP 3) Receiving end feedback signal of lyse syringe initial position sensor (OP 4) Sending end power signal of relieve valve position sensor (OP 6)
66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80
5-65
Hardware System 85
TDO
Data output pin of JTAG interface
GND
Digital ground
88
UP_TX
Serial port sending data signal (UART0)
89
UP_RX
Serial port receiving data signal (UART0)
GND
Digital ground
86 87
90 91 92
VC_SIN2
93
M_SIN3
94
VC_SIN5
95
M_SIN6
96
VC_SIN8
Sending end power signal of sample injection syringe initial position sensor (OP 2) Receiving end feedback signal of sheath syringe initial position sensor (OP 3) Sending end power signal of diluent syringe initial position sensor (OP 5) Receiving end feedback signal of relieve valve position sensor (OP 6) Sending end power signal of position sensor 8 (reserved)
Definition of J5
J5 connects to the PB2 connector of the motherboard, and is the interface used for the stepping motor control and the position sensor signal detection. Table 5-62 Stepping motor control interface-definition of J5 Pin
Definition
Note
1
M_SIN8
Receiving end feedback signal of position sensor 8 (reserved)
2
VC_SEN10
Sending end power signal of autoloading position sensor (OP 10)
3
M_SIN11
Receiving end feedback signal of position sensor 11 (reserved)
4
VC_SEN13
Sending end power signal of WBC bath position sensor (OP 13)
5
M_SIN14
6
VC_SEN16
7
GND
Digital ground
8
NC
Empty
9
24V0
24V power supply
Receiving end feedback signal of RBC bath position sensor (OP 14) Sending end power signal of sample probe Y lower position sensor (OP 16)
10 11 12 13 14
5-66
Hardware System 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
PGND
Power ground
33
VC_SEN9
Sending end power signal of close tube position sensor (OP 9)
34
M_SIN10
35
VC_SEN12
36
M_SIN13
37
VC_SEN15
38
M_SIN16
39
GND
Digital ground
40
NC
Empty
41
M1_A
42
M1_AN
43
M1_B
44
M1_BN
45
M2_A
29 30 31 32
Receiving end feedback signal of autoloading position sensor (OP 10) Sending end power signal of DIFF bath position sensor (OP 12) Receiving end feedback signal of WBC bath position sensor (OP 13) Sending end power signal of sample probe Y upper position sensor (OP 15) Receiving end feedback signal of sample probe Y lower position sensor (OP 16)
Connecting end A of A-phase winding of the sample syringe motor (SM 1) Connecting end AN of A-phase winding of the sample syringe motor (SM 1) Connecting end B of B-phase winding of the sample syringe motor (SM 1) Connecting end BN of B-phase winding of the sample syringe motor (SM 1) Connecting end A of A-phase winding of the sample injection 5-67
Hardware System syringe motor (SM 2) 46
M2_AN
47
M2_B
48
M2_BN
49
M3_A
50
M3_AN
51
M3_B
52
M3_BN
53
M4_A
54
M4_AN
55
M4_B
56
M4_BN
57
M5_A
58
M5_AN
59
M5_B
60
M5_BN
61
M6_A
62
M6_AN
63
M6_B
64
M6_BN
Connecting end AN of A-phase winding of the sample injection syringe motor (SM 2) Connecting end B of B-phase winding of the sample injection syringe motor (SM 2) Connecting end BN of B-phase winding of the sample injection syringe motor (SM 2) Connecting end A of A-phase winding of the sheath syringe motor (SM 3) Connecting end AN of A-phase winding of the sheath syringe motor (SM 3) Connecting end B of B-phase winding of the sheath syringe motor (SM 3) Connecting end BN of B-phase winding of the sheath syringe motor (SM 3) Connecting end A of A-phase winding of the lyse syringe motor (SM 4) Connecting end AN of A-phase winding of the lyse syringe motor (SM 4) Connecting end B of B-phase winding of the lyse syringe motor (SM 4) Connecting end BN of B-phase winding of the lyse syringe motor (SM 4) Connecting end A of A-phase winding of the diluent syringe motor (SM 5) Connecting end AN of A-phase winding of the diluent syringe motor (SM 5) Connecting end B of B-phase winding of the diluent syringe motor (SM 5) Connecting end BN of B-phase winding of the diluent syringe motor (SM 5) Connecting end A of A-phase winding of the reserved motor (SM 6, reserved) Connecting end AN of A-phase winding of the reserved motor (SM 6, reserved) Connecting end B of B-phase winding of the reserved motor (SM 6, reserved) Connecting end BN of B-phase winding of the reserved motor (SM 6, reserved)
5-68
Hardware System 65
M_SIN9
Receiving end feedback signal of close tube position sensor (OP 9)
66
VC_SEN11
Sending end power signal of position sensor 11 (reserved)
67
M_SIN12
68
VC_SEN14
69
M_SIN15
70
DCM
DC motor control signal (reserved)
71
GND
Digital ground
72
NC
Empty
73
M1_A
74
M1_AN
75
M1_B
76
M1_BN
77
M2_A
78
M2_AN
79
M2_B
80
M2_BN
81
M3_A
82
M3_AN
83
M3_B
84
M3_BN
85
M4_A
86
M4_AN
87
M4_B
Receiving end feedback signal of DIFF bath position sensor (OP 12) Sending end power signal of RBC bath position sensor (OP 14) Receiving end feedback signal of sample probe Y upper position sensor (OP 15)
Connecting end A of A-phase winding of the sample syringe motor (SM 1) Connecting end AN of A-phase winding of the sample syringe motor (SM 1) Connecting end B of B-phase winding of the sample syringe motor (SM 1) Connecting end BN of B-phase winding of the sample syringe motor (SM 1) Connecting end A of A-phase winding of the sample injection syringe motor (SM 2) Connecting end AN of A-phase winding of the sample injection syringe motor (SM 2) Connecting end B of B-phase winding of the sample injection syringe motor (SM 2) Connecting end BN of B-phase winding of the sample injection syringe motor (SM 2) Connecting end A of A-phase winding of the sheath syringe motor (SM 3) Connecting end AN of A-phase winding of the sheath syringe motor (SM 3) Connecting end B of B-phase winding of the sheath syringe motor (SM 3) Connecting end BN of B-phase winding of the sheath syringe motor (SM 3) Connecting end A of A-phase winding of the lyse syringe motor (SM 4) Connecting end AN of A-phase winding of the lyse syringe motor (SM 4) Connecting end B of B-phase winding of the lyse syringe motor 5-69
Hardware System (SM 4) 88
M4_BN
89
M5_A
90
M5_AN
91
M5_B
92
M5_BN
93
M6_A
94
M6_AN
95
M6_B
96
M6_BN
Connecting end BN of B-phase winding of the lyse syringe motor (SM 4) Connecting end A of A-phase winding of the diluent syringe motor (SM 5) Connecting end AN of A-phase winding of the diluent syringe motor (SM 5) Connecting end B of B-phase winding of the diluent syringe motor (SM 5) Connecting end BN of B-phase winding of the diluent syringe motor (SM 5) Connecting end A of A-phase winding of the reserved motor (SM 6, reserved) Connecting end AN of A-phase winding of the reserved motor (SM 6, reserved) Connecting end B of B-phase winding of the reserved motor (SM 6, reserved) Connecting end BN of B-phase winding of the reserved motor (SM 6, reserved)
Definition of J8
J8 is the interface used for communication debugging.
Definition of J9
J9 is the MCU debug interface (JTAG mode). Table 5-63 FPGA debug interface-definition of J9 Pin
Name
Pin
Name
1
VDD
2
GND
3
GND
4
TCK
5
TMS
6
TDO
7
TDI
8
NC
9
GND
10
NC
Definition of J10
J10 is the interface used for communication debugging.
5-70
Hardware System
Assembly drawing
Figure 5-15 Assembly drawing of the drive board
5.3.3 Adjustment and Test Points LED function definition Table 5-64 LED definition Indicator D1 D2 D49 D50 D51 D52
Note FPGA configuration status indicator. It turns on during FPGA configuration. FPGA working status indicator. It flashes every 1s when FPGA works normally. 24V power supply (24V0) status indicator. It turns on when the 24V power supply is normal. 3.3V power supply (VDD) status indicator. It turns on when the 3.3V power supply is normal. 12V power supply (12V0) status indicator. It turns on when the 12V power supply is normal. 5V power supply (VDD) status indicator. It turns on when the 5V analog power supply is normal. 5-71
Hardware System D65
MCU working status indicator. It flashes every 1s when MCU works normally.
D66
Working status indicator of optical system heater. It turns on during heating.
D67
Working status indicator of reaction bath (DIFF bath). It turns on during heating.
Function definition of test points Table 5-65 Test point definition No.
Name
Pin
Note
1
TP1
PIN26 of U2
FPGA configuration signals F_NCONFIG
2
TP2
PIN28 of U2
3
TP3
PIN228 of U2
4
TP4
PIN50 of U2
Read signals of MCU external bus /RD
5
TP5
PIN20 of U2
FPGA interrupt request signals FPGA_INT
6
TP6
PIN73 of U2
Write signals of MCU external bus /WR
7
TP7
PIN11 of U2
FPGA reset signals F_RST
8
TP8
1V5
9
TP9
SIO_IN
Data input signals of MCU valve control chip
10
TP10
SIO_CLK
Clock signals of MCU valve control chip
11
TP11
SIO_EN
Enabling signals of MCU valve control chip
12
TP12
SIO_LATCH
Data latch signals of MCU valve control chip
13
TP13
PIN17 of U10
14
TP14
PIN15 of U9
15
TP16
PIN15 of U21
16
TP17
PIN13 of U20
17
TP18
PIN17 of U20
18
TP19
PIN17 of U25
FPGA 24.5454MHz clock input signals FPGA_CLK Address latch enabling signals of MCU external bus ALE
Voltage
of
+1.5VDC
power
supply
(1.5±0.075V)
Stepping pulse signals of sample probe X motor STEP7 Stepping pulse signals of sample probe Y motor STEP8 Stepping pulse signals of sample syringe motor STEP1 Stepping pulse signals of sample injection syringe motor STEP2 Stepping pulse signals of sheath syringe motor STEP3 Stepping pulse signals of lyse syringe motor STEP4
5-72
Hardware System
19
TP20
PIN16 of U26
20
TP21
PIN11 of U10
21
TP22
VDD
22
TP23
23
TP24
24
TP25
1V5
25
TP26
PIN1 of U32
26
TP27
ADC_VCC
27
TP28
ADC_12V
28
TP29
ADC_24V
29
TP30
PIN1 of U33
30
TP31
PIN7 of U33
31
TP34
PIN2 of U37
34
TP35
PIN100 of U35
35
TP36
PIN26 of U35
36
TP37
PIN99 of U35
37
TP38
PIN57 of U35
38
TP39
PIN6 of U45
39
TP40
PRTD_REF
40
TP41
PIN2 of U45
41
TP42
PIN3 of U45
GND
Stepping pulse signals of diluent syringe motor STEP5 Stepping pulse signals of reserved motor STEP6 (not used) Voltage
of
+3.3VDC
power
supply
+1.5VDC
power
supply
detection
signals
(3.3±0.15V) Digital ground Voltage
of
(1.5±0.075V) Ambient
temperature
(voltage) AMBINET_T Detection signals of VCC（+5VDC） after voltage-dividing （2.00±0.15V） Detection signals of 12V0(+12VDC) after voltage-dividing （2.13±0.15V） Detection signals of 24V0(+24VDC) after voltage-dividing （2.23±0.15V） Pressure
chamber
detection
signals
(voltage) PRESSURE_1ST Vacuum
chamber
detection
signals
(voltage) PRESSURE_2ST Reference voltage of MCU analog-to-digital module REFIN（2.50±0.006V） Voltage of MCU digital-to-analog output channel 0 MCU 25.5454MHz clock input signals CLKIN Voltage of MCU digital-to-analog output channel 1 MCU system clock output signals SYSCLK Amplifier output signals of the temperature collection module TEMPER_AD Basic voltage of the amplifier input signals of the temperature collection module Reference voltage of temperature collection module amplifier Input voltage of temperature collection
5-73
Hardware System module amplifier 42
TP43
PIN8 of U22
43
TP44
PIN8 of U23
44
TP45
PIN8 of U24
45
TP46
PIN8 of U29
46
TP47
PIN8 of U28
47
TP48
PIN8 of U27
48
TP49
PIN8 of U11
49
TP50
PIN8 of U13
Driving reference voltage of sample syringe motor VREF1 Driving
reference
voltage
of
sample
injection syringe motor VREF2 Driving reference voltage of sheath syringe motor VREF3 Driving reference voltage of lyse syringe motor VREF4 Driving reference voltage of diluent syringe motor VREF5 Driving reference voltage of reserved motor VREF6 (not used) Driving reference voltage of sample probe X motor VREF7 Driving reference voltage of sample probe Y motor VREF8
Key definition The reset switch S1 on the drive board is used to reset the drive board manually. Press the reset switch to reset the MCU and FPGA.
5.3.4 Disassembly and assembly method Purpose The drive board is a key component. Please maintain or replace the drive board immediately if any error or damage occurs. Please follow the procedures to have the drive board replaced.
Tools 107 cross-headed screwdriver 107 flat-headed screwdriver
Disassembly Drive board disassembly consists of the following two main procedures:
Remove the drive board from the main unit:
1. Shutdown the analyzer and cut off the power supply; 2. Open the left door; 3. Use your hand or cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two hand-tightened screws 5-74
Hardware System from the bracket.
4. Use both of your hands to flip outward the two latches on both sides of the drive board, and then draw the drive board out.
Figure 5-16 Assembly drawing of drive board-1 1---Hand-tightened screws
2---Drive board
Further disassembly of the drive board
1. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the 5 cross-headed panhead screws (M3X6) from the drive board.
2. Remove the drive board from the bracket.
Figure 5-17 Assembly drawing of drive board-2 1---Drive board 3---Cross-recessed
2---Bracket panhead
screw
M3x6 (with washer)
5-75
Hardware System
Assembly Please assemble the data board as per the above-mentioned steps in the reverse order.
Wear antistatic gloves before maintaining or removing the board.
Be sure to shut down the analyzer and cut off the power supply before disassembling/assembling the board.
Verification 1. Check and make sure that all the components are properly connected to the drive board. 2. First ensure the power supply is cut off, then assemble the drive board and motherboard properly, then power on the analyzer.
3. Check if the indicators on the dive board are in the following status: 1) D49, D50 and D51 turn on; 2) D2 and D65 flash. You can also check the indicators in the “self-test” screen of the analyzer. If the self-test is passed, it means the driver board is replaced successfully; otherwise, you should troubleshoot the board.
5.3.5 Troubleshooting Error analysis and solutions Errors related to the drive board are identified and handled by the host control software in the form of error codes. Note that only some of the error codes reported to the host control software from the dive board can be handled automatically, while some need to be judged with the help of the users or service engineers. When error is reported, the error No. and error names are provided by host control software. The recommended solutions may appear on the screen as the software help information. When you check for errors, first ensure the board is well fixed and all the error-related connections are properly connected. For example, when “Sample probe action failed” is reported, you should check: 1) whether the sample probe assembly is properly connected to the board; 2) whether the connecters are well connected (in case of bad connection, shut down the analyzer and cut off the power supply, and then re-plug the connecters); 3)whether the connection inside the sample probe assembly is proper; 4) whether the symbol on the sensor connecting line corresponds to the sensor position; 5) whether the symbol on the motor connecting line corresponds to the motor position (See 6.6.1 for how to disassemble the sample probe assembly if necessary). Only when you make sure that nothing is wrong with the connections can you remove the error according to the recommended action in the following table. If the error still exists after the 5-76
Hardware System error causes are found and new components are replaced, you need to replace the drive board. The error codes, error names and recommended solutions are listed in the following table. Table 5-66 Troubleshooting common errors Error code
Error name
Recommended
Error feature
action
FPGA does not allow the MCU write data
into
the
valve-pump
data
register within 50ms, i.e. the serial 0100
Valve output failed
output status indication bit in the register (which is used to judge the
Replace drive board
status of valves and pumps of FPGA) is always 1. It might be FPGA error or MCU read register error. Valve NO. out of 0101
limit (greater than 40 or equal to 0)
Download Valve NO. out of limit (greater than 40 or equal to 0)
Communication abnormal.
Please
try again. 1. X motor error,
X motor failed to 0201
move
to
target
position
X motor does not move to the pre-set target position after action
action is interfered. 2. X motor target position photocoupler error. 1. X motor error,
X motor failed to 0202
move
to
position
home after
X motor is not at the home position after initialization
initialization
0203
home
position
2. X motor initial position photocoupler error. 1. X motor error,
X motor failed to leave
action is interfered.
after
X motor failed to leave home position when initializing
initialization
action is interfered. 2. X motor initial position photocoupler error. 1. X motor error,
0204
Adjusting X motor
X motor does not move to target
action is interfered.
to target position
position after the adjusting command
2. X motor target
failed
is executed.
position photocoupler error.
0205
Adjusting X motor
X motor does not back to home
1. X motor error,
back
position after the adjusting command
action is interfered.
to
home
5-77
Hardware System position failed
is executed
2. X motor initial position photocoupler error. 1. X motor error,
0206
Adjusting X motor
X motor does not leave home
action is interfered.
to
position after the adjusting command
2. X motor initial
is executed
position
leave
home
position failed
photocoupler error. 0207
0208
0209
X
motor
X motor adjustment is out of limit [1,
Re-send motor
the
X
adjusting
adjustment error
9]
X motor adjusting
X motor adjusting steps at the target
Adjust the X motor
steps out of limit
position are out of limit [-20, 20]
again
The position in the X motor adjusting
Re-send
end command disagrees with the
motor
pre-send adjusting position
command
X motor adjusting end position error
command
the
X
adjusting
1. Y motor error, Y motor failed to 0211
move
to
target
position
Y motor does not move to the pre-set target position after action
action is interfered. 2. Y motor target position photocoupler error. 1. Y motor error,
Y motor failed to 0212
initialize to upper position
Y motor is not at the upper position after initialization
action is interfered. 2. Y motor upper position photocoupler error. 1. Y motor error,
Y motor failed to 0213
initialize to lower position
Y motor does not move to
lower
position when initializing
action is interfered. 2. Y motor lower position photocoupler error. 1. Y motor error,
0214
Adjusting Y motor
Y motor does not move to target
action is interfered.
to target position
position after the adjusting command
2. Y motor target
failed
is executed.
position photocoupler error.
0215
Adjusting Y motor
Y motor does not back to upper
to upper position
position after the adjusting command
failed
is executed
5-78
1. Y motor error, action is interfered. 2. Y motor upper position
Hardware System photocoupler error. 1. Y motor error, 0216
Adjusting Y motor
Y motor does not leave upper
action is interfered.
to
position after the adjusting command
2. Y motor upper
is executed
position
leave
upper
position failed
photocoupler error. 0217
0218
0219
Y
motor
Y motor adjustment is out of limit [1,
Re-send motor
Y
adjusting
adjustment error
6]
Y motor adjusting
Y motor adjusting steps at the target
Adjust the Y motor
steps out of limit
position are out of limit [-63,63]
again
The position in the Y motor adjusting
Re-send
end command disagrees with the
motor
pre-send adjusting position
command
Y motor adjusting end position error
command
Send Sample 0220
the
probe
assembly
is
working
X motor or Y motor action is not finished.
the
adjusting the
probe after
Y
sample
command the
probe
sample
action
is
finished Can not send the command to move 0221
Cannot
adjust
sample probe
the
sample
probe
upward/downward/leftward/rightward by one step before sending the adjusting command.
0222
0223
X
motor
action
overtime X
motor
action
forbidden
match
current
position 0225
0226
Y
motor
action
overtime X
motor
action
forbidden
match position
after the adjusting command is sent.
The action time is longer than the X motor is not at the photocoupler
Move the Y motor to
position or Y motor is not at the
upper photocoupler
upper photocoupler position
position
X motor current position does not match the photocoupler position
Initialize the X motor
The action time is longer than the download time. X motor is not at the photocoupler position
Y motor does not 0227
sample probe only
download time.
X motor does not 0224
You can adjust the
current
Move the X motor to the
photocoupler
position
Y motor current position does not match the photocoupler position
5-79
Initialize the Y motor
Hardware System Y motor failed to 0228
pierce
to
lower
position Y motor failed to 0229
pierce
to
upper
position 0230
X
photocoupler error Sample
0231
motor probe
RBC
bath
photocoupler error Sample 0232
probe
WBC
bath
photocoupler error Sample 0233
probe
DIFF
bath
photocoupler error 0234
Y
photocoupler error Sample
0235
motor probe
upper photocoupler error Sample
0236
probe
lower
after piercing Y motor failed to back to upper position when piercing
Pierce again
Pierce again
X motor photocoupler might be
Replace
damaged
photocoupler
RBC bath photocoupler might be
Replace RBC bath
damaged
photocoupler
WBC bath photocoupler might be
Replace WBC bath
damaged
photocoupler
DIFF bath photocoupler might be
Replace DIFF bath
damaged
photocoupler
Y motor photocoupler might be
Replace
damaged
photocoupler
Upper
photocoupler
might
be
damaged Lower
X
motor
X
motor
Replace the upper photocoupler
photocoupler
might
be
Replace the lower
damaged
photocoupler
Sampling syringe does not finish the
Command is sent
Sampling syringe
previous action when it is requested
early
is working
for initializing, resetting, aspirating or
sampling syringe is
dispensing.
still working.
photocoupler error
0300
Y motor is not at the lower position
while
the
1. Sampling syringe photocoupler
error
(if sampling syringe 0301
Sampling syringe
The detected photocoupler signals
motor moves)
photocoupler
are without any change before and
2. Sampling syringe
abnormal
after action.
motor
error
sampling motor
(if
syringe dose
not
move) 0302
Sampling syringe
After aspirating or dispensing, the
1. Sampling syringe
aspirating
sampling syringe should be at the
photocoupler
or
5-80
error
Hardware System dispensing action
home position, but the position
(if
failed 1
detected
syringe motor is at
by
the
photocoupler
disagrees
the
sampling
the home position) 2. Sampling syringe motor error (if the sampling
syringe
motor is not at the home position) 1. Sampling syringe photocoupler (if Sampling syringe 0303
aspirating
or
dispensing action failed 2
the
error
sample
After aspirating or dispensing, the
syringe motor is not
sampling syringe should not be at
at
the home position, but the position
position)
detected
2. Sampling syringe
by
the
photocoupler
the
home
motor error (if the
disagrees
sampling
syringe
motor is
at the
home position) Sampling syringe 0304
aspirating
or
dispensing action forbidden
aspirating
Sampling
sampling syringe should be at the
photocoupler
home
(if
position,
position
but
detected
the
actual
by
the
photocoupler disagrees
Sampling syringe 0305
Before aspirating or dispensing, the
or
dispensing action forbidden 2
sampling syringe should not be at the home position, but the actual detected
the
by
the
photocoupler disagrees
sampling
syringe motor is at Sampling (if
the
sampling
at
the
aspirate
volume
and
over range
volume
+
aspirated
volume > maximum aspirate volume
make
nothing with
sampling Requested
home
position)
wrong
0306
error
syringe motor is not
sure
syringe
syringe
photocoupler
Check
Sample
error
the home position)
Before aspirating or dispensing, the
position
syringe
the
syringe
aspirating
and
dispensing then
is
action; consider
programming overflow fluidics 5-81
at
the
debugging
Hardware System phase. Check sure
and
make
nothing
wrong
with
sampling
the
syringe
aspirating 0307
Sample
syringe
dispense
volume
over range
Requested
volume
>
aspirated
volume
is
and
dispensing then
action; consider
programming overflow fluidics
at
the
debugging
phase and note the volume
add
up
error. 0308
Sampling syringe
The action time is longer than the
action overtime
download time. Sample injection syringe does not
0310
Sample
injection
finish the previous action when it is
syringe is working
requested for initializing, resetting, aspirating or dispensing.
Command is sent early
while
the
sample
injection
syringe
is
still
working. 1. Sample injection syringe photocoupler
Sample 0311
injection
syringe photocoupler abnormal
error
(if sample injection The detected photocoupler signals
syringe
are without any change before and
moves)
after action.
2. Sample injection
motor
syringe motor error (if sample injection syringe motor does not move) 1. Sample injection syringe injection
After aspirating or dispensing, the
photocoupler
syringe aspirating
syringe should be at the home
(if sample injection
or
position, but the position detected by
syringe is at the
the photocoupler disagrees
home position)
Sample 0312
dispensing
action failed 1
error
2. Sample injection syringe motor error 5-82
Hardware System (if sample injection syringe is not at the home position) 1. Sample injection syringe photocoupler injection
After aspirating or dispensing, the
syringe aspirating
syringe should not be at the home
or
position, but the position detected by
Sample 0313
dispensing
action failed 2
the photocoupler disagrees
error
(if sample injection syringe is not at the home position) 2. Sample injection syringe motor error (if sample injection syringe is at the home position) Sample
Sample 0314
injection
injection
Before aspirating or dispensing, the
syringe
syringe aspirating
syringe should be at the home
photocoupler
or
position, but the position detected by
(if sample injection
the photocoupler disagrees
syringe is at the
dispensing
action forbidden 1
error
home position) Sample Sample 0315
injection
injection
Before aspirating or dispensing, the
syringe
syringe aspirating
syringe should not be at the home
photocoupler
or
position, but the position detected by
(if sample injection
the photocoupler disagrees
syringe is not at the
dispensing
action forbidden 2
error
home position) Check sure
and
nothing
wrong
with
sampling 0316
Sample
injection
syringe
aspirate
volume over range
Requested
volume
+
aspirated
volume > maximum aspirate volume
make the
syringe
aspirating
and
dispensing then
is
action; consider
programming overflow fluidics
at
the
debugging
phase. 0317
Sample
injection
syringe
dispense
volume over range
Requested
volume
volume
>
aspirated
Check sure wrong
5-83
and
make
nothing with
is the
Hardware System sampling
syringe
aspirating
and
dispensing then
action; consider
programming overflow
at
fluidics
the
debugging
phase and note the volume
add
up
error. 0318
Sample
injection
syringe
action
overtime
0320
The action time is longer than the download time. Sheath fluid syringe does not finish
Command is sent
fluid
the previous action when it is
early
syringe is working
requested for initializing, resetting,
sheath fluid syringe
aspirating or dispensing.
is still working.
sheath
1.
while
Sheath
the
fluid
syringe
Sheath 0321
fluid
syringe photocoupler abnormal
photocoupler
error
(if
fluid
sheath
The detected photocoupler signals
syringe
are without any change before and
moves)
after action.
2.
Sheath
motor fluid
syringe motor error (if
sheath
fluid
syringe motor dose not move) 1.
Sheath
fluid
syringe error
(if
fluid
sheath
fluid
After aspirating or dispensing, the
syringe motor is at
syringe aspirating
syringe should be at the home
the home position)
or
position, but the position detected by
2.
the photocoupler disagrees
syringe motor error
Sheath 0322
photocoupler
dispensing
action failed 1
(if
Sheath sheath
fluid fluid
syringe motor is not at
the
position) 5-84
home
Hardware System 1.
Sheath
fluid
syringe error
(if
fluid
sheath
fluid
After aspirating or dispensing, the
syringe motor is not
syringe aspirating
syringe should not be at the home
at
or
position, but the position detected by
position)
the photocoupler disagrees
2.
Sheath 0323
photocoupler
dispensing
action failed 2
the
home
Sheath
fluid
syringe motor error (if
sheath
fluid
syringe motor is at the home position) Sheath 0324
0325
fluid
Before aspirating or dispensing, the
syringe aspirating
syringe should be at the home
or
position, but the position detected by
dispensing
action forbidden 1
the photocoupler disagrees
Sheath
fluid
Before aspirating or dispensing, the
syringe aspirating
syringe should not be at the home
or
position, but the position detected by
dispensing
action forbidden 2
Sheath fluid syringe photocoupler
(if sample syringe motor is at the home position)
the photocoupler disagrees
Sheath fluid syringe photocoupler
motor is not at the home position) sure
and with
sampling 0326
syringe
aspirate
volume over range
Requested
volume
+
aspirated
volume > maximum aspirate volume
make
nothing
wrong fluid
error
(if sample syringe
Check
Sheath
error
is the
syringe
aspirating
and
dispensing then
action; consider
programming overflow
at
fluidics
the
debugging
phase. Check sure 0327
Sheath
fluid
syringe
dispense
volume over range
Requested
volume
volume
>
aspirated
and
nothing
wrong
with
sampling aspirating dispensing then
5-85
make is the
syringe and action; consider
Hardware System programming overflow fluidics
at
the
debugging
phase and note the volume
add
up
error. 0328
Sheath
fluid
syringe
action
overtime
0330
Lyse
syringe
is
working
The action time is longer than the download time. Lyse syringe does not finish the
Command is sent
previous action when it is requested
early while the lyse
for initializing, resetting, aspirating or
syringe
dispensing.
working. 1.
is
Lyse
still syringe
photocoupler Lyse 0331
syringe
The detected photocoupler signals
photocoupler
are without any change before and
abnormal
after action.
error
(if the lyse syringe motor moves) 2.
Lyse
syringe
motor error (if the lyse syringe motor does not move) 1.
Lyse
syringe
photocoupler
error
(if the lyse syringe Lyse 0332
syringe
After aspirating or dispensing, the
motor is at the home
or
syringe should be at the home
position)
dispensing action
position, but the position detected by
2.
failed 1
the photocoupler disagrees
motor error (if the
aspirating
Lyse
syringe
lyse syringe motor is not at the home position) 1.
Lyse
syringe
photocoupler syringe
After aspirating or dispensing, the
or
syringe should not be at the home
dispensing action
position, but the position detected by
failed 2
the photocoupler disagrees
Lyse 0333
aspirating
error
(if the lyse syringe motor is not at the home position) 2.
Lyse
syringe
motor error (if the lyse syringe motor is
5-86
at
the
home
Hardware System position) Lyse 0334
syringe
Before aspirating or dispensing, the
or
syringe should be at the home
dispensing action
position, but the position detected by
forbidden 1
the photocoupler disagrees
aspirating
Lyse 0335
syringe
photocoupler
Before aspirating or dispensing, the
or
syringe should not be at the home
dispensing action
position, but the position detected by
forbidden 2
the photocoupler disagrees
(if the lyse syringe motor is at the home Lyse
syringe
photocoupler
motor is not at the home position) sure
and with
sampling 0336
aspirate
volume
over range
Requested
volume
+
aspirated
volume > maximum aspirate volume
make
nothing
wrong syringe
error
(if the lyse syringe
Check
Lyse
error
position)
syringe
aspirating
Lyse
is the
syringe
aspirating
and
dispensing then
action; consider
programming overflow
at
fluidics
the
debugging
phase. Check sure
and
make
nothing
wrong
with
sampling
0337
syringe
dispense
volume
over range
Requested
volume
>
aspirated
volume
and
dispensing then
the
syringe
aspirating Lyse
is
action; consider
programming overflow fluidics
at
the
debugging
phase and note the volume
add
up
error. 0338
0340
Lyse
syringe
action overtime Diluent syringe is working
The action time is longer than the download time. Diluent syringe does not finish the
Command is sent
previous action when it is requested
early
while
for initializing, resetting, aspirating or
diluent
syringe
5-87
the is
Hardware System dispensing.
still working. 1. Diluent syringe photocoupler (if
Diluent 0341
syringe
The detected photocoupler signals
photocoupler
are without any change before and
abnormal
after action.
the
error diluent
syringe
motor
moves) 2. Diluent
syringe
motor error (if the diluent
syringe
motor
dose
not
move) 1. Diluent syringe photocoupler (if
diluent
syringe
After aspirating or dispensing, the
syringe motor is at
or
syringe should be at the home
the home position)
dispensing action
position, but the position detected by
2. Diluent syringe
failed 1
the photocoupler disagrees
motor error (if the
Diluent 0342
the
error
aspirating
diluent
syringe
motor is not at the home position) 1. Diluent syringe photocoupler (if Diluent 0343
syringe
After aspirating or dispensing, the
or
syringe should not be at the home
dispensing action
position, but the position detected by
failed 2
the photocoupler disagrees
aspirating
the
error diluent
syringe motor is not at
the
home
position) 2. Diluent syringe motor error (if the diluent
syringe
motor is at the home position) Diluent 0344
syringe
Before aspirating or dispensing, the
or
syringe should be at the home
dispensing action
position, but the position detected by
forbidden 1
the photocoupler disagrees
aspirating
Diluent 0345
Diluent
syringe
photocoupler (if
the
diluent
syringe motor is at the home position)
syringe
Before aspirating or dispensing, the
Diluent
or
syringe should not be at the home
photocoupler
dispensing action
position, but the position detected by
(if
aspirating
5-88
error
the
syringe error diluent
Hardware System forbidden 2
the photocoupler disagrees
syringe motor is not at
the
home
position) Check sure
and
nothing
wrong
with
sampling 0346
Diluent
syringe
aspirate
volume
over range
Requested
volume
+
aspirated
volume > maximum aspirate volume
make is the
syringe
aspirating
and
dispensing then
action; consider
programming overflow
at
fluidics
the
debugging
phase. Check sure
and
make
nothing
wrong
with
sampling
0347
syringe
dispense
volume
over range
Requested
volume
>
aspirated
volume
the
syringe
aspirating Diluent
is
and
dispensing then
action; consider
programming overflow fluidics
at
the
debugging
phase and note the volume
add
up
error. 0348
0390
Diluent
download time.
Automatic testing
Start testing the motors before the
command
automatic
forbidden
received.
0403
testing
command
is
The optical system temp. setup is
temp. setup out of
out of the MCU pre-set range
limit
[30℃,50℃] bath
The reaction bath temp. setup is out
temp. setup out of
of
limit
[30℃,50℃]
Optical
system
First
start
automatic
the testing
command, and then test the motors.
system
Reaction 0402
The action time is longer than the
action overtime
Optical 0401
syringe
the
MCU
pre-set
range
Optical system temperature is out of 5-89
Re-set the optical system temperature Re-set the reaction bath temperature 1. Check whether
Hardware System temp. error
the set range
the heater of the optical
system
is
well connected. 2. Check whether the
temperature
collection of
channel
the
optical
system is normal. 1. Check whether the heater of the reaction bath is well 0404
Reaction
bath
temp. error
Reaction bath temperature is out of the set range
connected. 2. Check whether the
temperature
collection
channel
of the reaction bath is normal. 1.
The
actual
ambient temperature is out of 0501
Ambient
temp.
abnormal
the
working
Ambient temperature is out of the set
range.
range
2. Check whether the
temperature
transducer and the measurement circuit work normally. 1. Check whether the
pneumatic
connection is well
0601
connected
and
whether
the
Controlling
The pressure in the chamber can not
pressure
pump
pressure chamber
reach the target range within the
works normally.
pressure failed
specified fluidics time.
2. Check whether the pressure sensor works normally and whether pressure
the detection
signals of the MCU 5-90
Hardware System are normal. 1. Check whether the
pneumatic
connection is well connected
and
whether the vacuum pump and valve 30 0602
Controlling
The vacuum in the chamber can not
and
vacuum chamber
reach the target range within the
normally.
vacuum failed
specified fluidics time.
2. Check whether
31
works
the pressure sensor works normally and whether
the
pressure
detection
signals of the MCU are normal. Wait and then send
0603
Adjusting
The pressure in the chamber is
pressure chamber
being controlled. Can not send the
pressure failed
adjusting command
the
adjusting
command
again
after the previous pressure controlling is done. Wait and then send
0604
Adjusting vacuum
The vacuum in the chamber is being
chamber vacuum
controlled.
failed
adjusting command
Can
not
send
the
the
adjusting
command
again
after the previous vacuum controlling is done. 1. Check whether the
pneumatic
connection is well
Pressure chamber 0605
pressure limit
out
of
connected
and
whether
the
The pressure in the chamber is out
pressure
of the set range
works normally.
pump
2. Check whether the pressure sensor works normally and whether pressure 5-91
the detection
Hardware System signals of the MCU are normal. 1. Check whether the
pneumatic
connection is well connected
and
whether the vacuum pump and valve 30 Vacuum chamber 0606
vacuum
out
of
limit
The vacuum in the chamber is out of the set range
and
31
works
normally. 2. Check whether the pressure sensor works normally and whether pressure
the detection
signals of the MCU are normal. Pressure chamber 0607
pressure
control
range error Vacuum chamber 0608
vacuum
control
range error 0701 0702
FPGA
download
chamber is of negative range. The vacuum control of the vacuum chamber is of positive range Wrong download mark. It is not ':'
FPGA
The download command is not
command error
command
of
Re-send the control command
of
negative range
start
download
Re-send the control positive range
mark error
Read 0703
The pressure control of the pressure
defined.
Re-download Re-download
all
configuration chip
Finish reading data
content finished 0704
Data write out of
The data written for a single time
limit
exceeds the maximum of 32 digits
Data
write
and
The
data
written
plus
the
head-address
head-address exceed the maximum
over range
content of one page (256 bytes).
0706
Write forbidden
Failed to write the configuration chip
0707
Write overtime
Write delay exceeds 10ms
0705
0731
Write-in EEPROM error
Failed to write data into EEPROM
5-92
Re-download
Re-download Send the enabling command first Re-download 1.
Check
the
EEPROM circuit for
Hardware System any missing-soldered component;
check
the EEPROM pin for short
circuit
and
missolder, etc. 2. If short circuit is not found and all components
are
properly soldered, it indicates
the
EEPROM
is
damaged. Functional code in 0801
the control code error
0802
0803
0804
0805
Data length error
Command error
Check code error
End code error code
the control code
Sequence
pack
analyzing
abnormal.
Please
The data length mismatches the
Communication
corresponding data length of the
abnormal.
current command label
try again.
The command label is not defined in
Please
Communication abnormal.
Please
try again.
The check code mismatches the calculated one
Communication abnormal.
Please
try again.
in the communication rules. (016) in
Communication try again.
The end code is not the one defined
error
0807
the communication rules.
the communication rules.
Identity 0806
label
The functional code is not defined in
The identity code is not defined in the communication rules.
Communication abnormal.
Please
try again. Communication abnormal.
Please
try again.
Can not continue analyzing the next sequence pack if a sequence pack is being analyzed
Wait
for
the
previous sequence pack
finish
analyzing
The drive board starts analysis 0808
No
complete
sequence pack
command
before
a
complete
sequence pack (consists of pack
Re-send a complete sequence pack
head, body and end) is received. 0809
Sequence
pack
The pack head command is sent 5-93
Re-send a complete
Hardware System head frame error
when the previous sequence pack
sequence pack
has not been sent completely. Check
0810
Sequence
pack
start No. error
The sequence pack No. in the start command
is
different
with
the
sequence pack No. to be analyzed.
the
sequence pack No. in
the
start
command
and
re-send
the
start
command Check the number 0811
Sequence
pack
total frames error
The number of frames in the pack
of frames in the
end command is different with the
pack end command
previously saved fames.
and
re-send
the
sequence pack Re-send Write-in sequence 0812
pack buffer zone failed
Insufficient room in the MCU for storing sequence pack
the
sequence when sufficient
pack
there
is
room
in
the MCU 0813 0814
0815
Sequence
The sequence pack end frame is
Re-send a complete
end frame error
sent without sending the head frame.
sequence pack
Sequence
The sequence pack body frame is
Re-send a complete
sent without sending the head frame.
sequence pack
pack
body frame error Sequence
pack
frame order error Sequence
0816
pack
pack
execution overtime
0817
The commands in the sent sequence pack are not arranged in the order of start time.
sequence pack Check
the
max
The sequence pack execution time
execution time and
exceeds the pre-set time.
re-send
the
sequence pack
None-sequence
The none-sequence pack command
pack
is added into the sequence pack
error
Re-send a complete
analysis
commands.
Re-send a complete sequence pack
Troubleshooting special errors 1. Troubleshooting the abnormal pneumatic pressure
If a certain pressure value is abnormal, check the related pumps, valves and airway for leakage.
If the pneumatic system is normal, then the error should be caused by the damaged pressure sensor on the drive board. Please replace the sensor or the drive board.
5-94
Hardware System
The pressure signals are outputted by the volumetric board. See the following table for the voltage and pressure. Table 5-67 Voltage signals and the corresponding pressures
Pressure
Pressure
Test
Relation
channel
range
point
output voltage and pressure
2.5～4kPa
TP30
Pressure chamber
-8
chamber
-40kPa
sensor
Note P
represents
pressure,
and
its unit is kPa.
P Vout 1.25 250
～
Vacuum
between
Vout represents the voltage of
TP31
the test point, and its unit is V
2. Troubleshooting the abnormal mechanism action To observe and troubleshoot the abnormal mechanism actions, the service engineers are usually needed. When errors of this kind happen, please be sure to troubleshoot them as per the above-mentioned recommended action and the following procedures.
Check whether the error-related mechanisms (such as motors) can move. If the mechanisms do not move, then the error should be caused by the abnormal executive components, such as disconnected or damaged motor. If nothing is wrong with them, then the error should be caused by the damaged drive board, so the driver board should be replaced.
If the mechanisms can move, check whether they move in position and whether they are jammed by lines or other mechanisms during the movement. For transmissive photocoupler, if the baffle enters above 2/3 photocoupler, it is baffled and moves is in position.
If nothing is wrong with the mechanism action, consider the photocoupler error. Replace the photocoupler.
If errors still remain after the photocoupler is replaced, then it should be caused by the error components on the driver board. Replace the driver board.
5.4 Power board 5.4.1 Introduction The
power
board
provides
six
D5V,A+12V,A-12V,AC130V,P12V and P24V.
5-95
stable
power
supplies,
including
Hardware System
5.4.2 Board Composition Function The power board provides the following six stable power supplies for each functional board and module of the BC-5300: D5V,A+12V,A-12V,AC130V,P12V and P24V.
Block diagram
Figure 5-18 Block diagram of the power board
Description
The power board works with the 90V-264V AC input voltage (50-60Hz). Once
the
AC
power
switch
is
turned
on,
all
the
D5V,A+12V,A-12V,AC130V,P12V and P24V voltage are outputted. Circuit loads of the power board are described in the table below:
5-96
circuits
work
and
the
Hardware System Table 5-68 Output voltage features Voltage
Minimum
Nominal
Output voltage
Voltage
Load
current
current
range
adjustment
adjustment
rate
rate
Noise
D5V
2A
5A
4.85/5.25V
±1％
±5%
100mV
+A12V
0mA
1A
11. 5/12. 5V
±1％
±5%
100mV
-A12V
0mA
650mA
-11.5/-12.5V
±1％
±5%
100mV
P12V
0.3A
5.5A
11.5/12.5V
±1％
±5%
150mV
P24V
0A
4A
22/27V
±1％
±10%
150mV
AC120V
0mA
60mA
115/145V(RMS)
±1％
±10%
/
For the P24V, the 7.8A maximum current with the approximate lasting time of 2S and the period of 60S may occur when working.
Interface definition
The power board is configured with 7 external interfaces. The J1 and J2 interfaces are connectors of the socket; the rest of the interfaces are connectors of the plug terminal leading from the board edges. The No. of the PCB board is TP1-TP20.The location of the interfaces on the power board is shown below.
5-97
Hardware System
Figure 5-19 Interface layout of the power board See the following table for the function of each interface. Table 5-69 Interfaces on the power board Interface J1
Function AC input
Number of pins
Number of lands
Note
3
/
/
6
/
/
Power supply output J2
of the fans
PCB soldering
Power supply output A-J12
of the analog part
6
4
output PCB soldering
A-J13
AC output
3
2
output
A-J35
Power supply output
10
10
PCB
5-98
Hardware System of the power part
soldering output PCB
Power supply output A-J37
soldering 4
of the digital part
4
output
Definition of J1: Table 5-70 Definition of AC input interface Pin
Definition
1
L,Live wire
2
PG,Earth wire
3
N,Neutral wire
Definition of J2: Table 5-71 Definition of the fan interface Pin
Definition P12V,connects the positive end of the P12V output voltage
1/3/5
PGND,connects the negative end of the P12V 2/4/6
output voltage
Definition of A－J12: Table 5-72 Definition of analog board output Land
Definition AGND,connects
the
Pin reference
ground of the analog board output TP16AGND\TP17AGND
voltage
6,7
+A12V,connects the positive end of
5
the +A12V output voltage
TP15A12V
-A12V,connects the negative end of
TP18A-12V
the -A12V output voltage
/
NC
1/2/3/4
Definition of A－J13: Table 5-73 Definition of AC output Land TP19\TP20
Definition Two
output
8
ends 5-99
Pin of
1/3
Hardware System AC120 /
NC
2
Definition of A－J35: Table 5-74 Definition of power supply output Land
Definition positive end of the P12V
TP1P12V/TP2P12V
Pin
output voltage
TP12PGND/TP13PGND/TP3P
negative end of the P12V
GND\TP4PGND\TP14PGND
output voltage
TP9P24V\TP10P24V\TP11P24
Positive end of the P24V
V
output voltage
4/5 6/7/8/9/10 1/2/3
Definition of A－J37: Table 5-75 Definition of D5V output Land TP5D5V/TP6D5V TP7DGND/TP8DGND
Definition
Pin
Positive end of the 5V output voltage
1/2
DGND, negative end of the
3/4
5V output voltage
5-100
Hardware System
Assembly drawing
Figure 5-20 Assembly drawing of the power board
5.4.3 Adjustment and Test Points The important test points when maintaining the power board are listed below:
5-101
Hardware System Table 5-76 Test points on the power board No.
Pin
Function
Reference value
1
Q101.2
Q101 switching waveform
/
2
Q101.1
Q101 drive waveform
/
3
C114.+
PFC output voltage
390±20V
4
U101.9
Reference output voltage of the chip
7.5V
5
U101.14
U101 oscillating waveform
/
6
C206.+
VCC voltage
17V~22.5V
7
C204
VDD voltage
12±1V
8
C223
supply voltage of U201
12±1V
9
Q201.1
Q201 drive waveform
/
10
Q201.2
Q201 switching waveform
/
11
U201.8
U201 reference voltage
5V
12
U201.4
U201 oscillating waveform
/
13
Q201.3
R235 voltage waveform, Q201 current
/
waveform 14
C232.+
D5V output voltage and ripple voltage
5±0.5V
15
C311.+
U301 supply voltage
12±1V
16
U301.4
U301 oscillating waveform
/
17
U301.8
U301 reference voltage
8V
18
Q303.1
Q303 drive waveform
/
19
Q303.2
Q303 switching waveform
/
20
Q303.3
Q303 current waveform, R313 voltage
/
waveform 21
C326.+
12VB voltage
12±0.5V
22
C328.+
130V DC output
115V～150V
23
C332.+
A+12V output
12±0.5V
24
C338.-
A-12V output
-12±0.5V
25
U351.15
U351 supply voltage
12±0.5V
26
U351.5
U351 oscillating waveform
/
27
U351.11
Q351 drive waveform
/
28
U351.14
Q351 drive waveform
/
29
U351.16
U351 reference voltage
5V
30
Q361.1
Q361 drive waveform
/
31
Q362.1
Q362 drive waveform
/
32
Q363.1
Q363 drive waveform
/
33
Q364.1
Q364 drive waveform
/
34
C409.＋
U401 supply voltage
12±1V
5-102
Hardware System 35
U401.5
U401 oscillating waveform
/
36
U401.14
U401 reference voltage
5V
37
U401.9
Q401 drive waveform
/
38
Q406.1
Q406 drive waveform
/
39
Q406.2
Q406 switching waveform
/
40
C423.+
P24V output voltage, ripple
22~27V
41
C442.+
P12V output voltage, ripple
12±0.5V
5.4.4 Replacement and Connection Purpose Damaged power assembly or power board needs to be replaced by a new one.
Tools 107 cross-headed screwdriver Sharp-nose pliers Multimeter
Disassembly Disassembly of the power board consists of the following two main procedures (removing the whole power assembly and further disassembly of the inner components):
Remove the whole power assembly from the main unit:
1. Shutdown the analyzer and cut off the power supply; 2. Open the left door; 3. Remove the data board（see section 5.2.4 for details） ； 4. Remove the drive board（see section 5.3.4 for details） ； 5. Unplug the 3 cables connecting the power assembly from the mother board; loose the cable fixer and remove the cables. 6. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the cross-headed panhead screws (M4X8) fixing the earth wire from the ground pole. 7. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the 6 cross-headed panhead screws (M4X8) fixing the power assembly. 8. Draw out the power assembly for 50-100mm and unplug the 2 cable connectors connecting the power switch. 9. Draw out and remove the power assembly.
5-103
Hardware System
Figure 5-21 Removing the power assembly 1 1 ---Mother board
2 --- Power switch
3 --- Power assembly
4 ---Panhead screw M4X8
5 ---Ground pole
Further disassembly of the power assembly
1. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the 2 cross-headed panhead screws (M4X8) fixing the power cover, and then remove the cover together with the power socket from the power assembly. 2. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the 2 cross-headed panhead screws (M3X8) fixing the power socket, and then disassembly the power socket. 3. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the 4 cross-headed panhead screws (M3X8) fixing the shielding box, and then remove the shielding cover. 4. Use the shape-nose pliers to loose the 6 M3 nuts fixing the fan and unplug the cable plug from the power board, and then remove the fan. 5. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the 9 cross-headed panhead screws (M3X6) from the power board, and then remove the power board.
5-104
Hardware System
Figure 5-22 removing the power assembly 2 1---Panhead screw M3X8
2 --- Power socket
3---Panhead screw M4X8
4 ---Fan
5---M3 Nut
6---Power board
7 ---fixing board for power board
8---Cross-recessed panhead screw M3x6
9---Power board shielding cover
10 ---Power cover
Assembly Assemble the power board as per the above-mentioned steps in the reverse order.
Wear antistatic gloves before maintaining or removing the board.
Be sure to shut down the analyzer and cut off the power supply before disassembling/assembling the board.
Verification 2. Check and make sure the earth wire of the AC input socket is properly connected to the conductive cover of the main unit. 3. Connect the power cord and turn on the AC switch, then the fan works.
5-105
Hardware System
When assembling, before fixing the upper cover of the power assembly, be sure the AC plug and the plug of the fan are connected with the power board.
Be sure the screws are tightened to firmly fix the power assembly with the main unit.
5.4.5 Troubleshooting Causes and recommended action Refer to the flow chart below to troubleshoot the power board.
5-106
Hardware System
Figure 5-23 Power board troubleshooting flow chart
Be sure the screws are tightened to firmly fix the power assembly with the main unit.
5-107
Hardware System
5.5 Volumetric and pressure detecting board 5.5.1 Introduction The volumetric board provides the metric time signals for the RBC/PLT and WBC count. Principles for the volumetric time signals: the detected volumetric start and end signals are processed by the volumetric sensor, through current-voltage transferring, level-transforming and de-bouncing, the drive-board-required TTL level is obtained and outputted. Principles for the vacuum and pressure detecting: the detected vacuum and pressure signals are transferred to the current signals by the vacuum and pressure sensor, and then through the signal transferring, the AD-required the voltage signals are outputted to the drive board.
5.5.2 Board Composition Function
Provides the time signals of RBC/PLT and WBC count, i.e. the start and end time of running.
Provides the vacuum and pressure intensity signals of the vacuum chamber and pressure chamber, sends the signals to the drive board.
Block diagram
Figure 5-24 Block diagram of the volumetric and pressure detecting board
5-108
Hardware System
Description
WBC count start/end signals
The WBC count start/end signals detected by the WBC volumetric sensor are I-V transferred, level-transformed and de-bounced by the volumetric board, and then sent to the drive board.
RBC/PLT count start/end signals
The RBC/PLT count start/end signals detected by the RBC/PLT volumetric sensor are I-V transferred, level-transformed and de-bounced by the volumetric board, and then sent to the drive board.
Drive control the volumetric sensor
The working status of the volumetric sensor is controlled by the drive board through J1 connector. When the level of the control signal is high, the volumetric sensor doesn't work; when the level is low, the volumetric sensor works.
Vacuum/pressure voltage signals
The vacuum/pressure intensity signals of the vacuum/pressure chamber are transferred to the voltage signals by the vacuum/pressure sensor on the volumetric board. Then, they are further transferred to the A/D-required voltage signals and then sent to the drive board through the J1 connector.
Interface definition The volumetric board has only one 12PIN connector connecting the drive board. The location of the connector is shown below.
5-109
Hardware System
Figure 5-25 Interface layout of the volumetric board
Table 5-77 Pin definition No.
Pin
Signal description
Signal Type
1
P+12V
+12V power sullpy
+12 power supply
2
PGND
Power ground
/
3
DGND
Digital ground
/
4
POSI_PRESS
Pressure voltage signals output
Analog
5
NEGA_PRESS
Vacuum voltage signals output
Analog
6
DGND
Digital ground
/
7
#VM_CTRL
Volumetric sensor control signals
TTL level
8
＃RBC_START
RBC count start signals
TTL level
9
＃RBC_STOP
RBC count stop signals
TTL level
10
＃WBC_START
WBC count start signals
TTL level
11
＃WBC_STOP
WBC count stop signals
TTL level
12
D+5V
Digital +5V power supply
+5V power supply
5-110
Hardware System
Assembly drawing
Figure 5-26 Assembly drawing of the volumetric board-Top
Figure 5-27 Assembly drawing of the volumetric board-Bottom
5.5.3 Disassembly and assembly method Purpose The volumetric board is the front component of the whole device. Damaged volumetric board needs to be replaced by a new one. Please follow the procedures to have the volumetric board replaced.
5-111
Hardware System
Tools 107 cross-headed screwdriver 107 flat-headed screwdriver Sharp-nosed pliers
Disassembly 4. Shut down the analyzer; 5. Open the right door; 6. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the 2 cross-headed panhead screws (M3X8) fixing the shielding box, and then remove the shielding cover. 7. Disconnect the 4 pipes connecting the volumetric tube. 8. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the 2 cross-headed panhead screws (M3X8), and use the sharp-nosed pliers to remove the 2 socket cap screws (M3X16) fixing the volumetric board. 9. Pull out the volumetric board for 30-50mm; unplug the cable connectors on its back and disconnect the 2 pipes, and then remove the board.
Figure 5-28 Disassembly of the volumetric board 1---volumetric tube bracket
2---Panhead screw M3X8
3---Volumetric tube
4---Rubber ring
5---Socket cap screws (M3X16)
6---Shielding box of volumetric board
7---Volumetric board
5-112
Hardware System
Assembly Assemble the power board as per the above-mentioned steps in the reverse order.
Verification 1.
The volumetric board is assembled properly.
2.
Start up the analyzer properly.
3.
Running samples in the whole blood mode. If the RBC/WBC clogging, bubbles and abnormal pressure/vacuum are not reported by the analyzer, the replacement is succeeded. If one or more above-mentioned error(s) is reported, you should remove the error accordingly.
5.5.4 Troubleshooting Table 5-78 Troubleshooting the volumetric board No.
Error
Error name
type
Error feature
Causes
Probability
Improper
or disconnection
1
supply error
System error
The voltage of
caused
the P+12V test
broken cable
point
Improper
is
equal
not to
12V±0.6V.
by
supply main
Medium
a
cable
or
change a new cable
power of
the
unit
or
Improper power sent
Reconnect the
with
the mother board
power
action
cable
connection
+12V
Recommended
+12V
See troubleshooting Low
supply by
of
the
board
drive and
power board
the
mother board The voltage of 2
+5V
power
supply error
Board error
the P+5V test point
is
equal 5V±0.25V.
not to
L2 is damaged (or rosin jointed) or something is wrong
(rosin
jointed) with the C20 and C13.
5-113
Low
Replace
or
re-solder
the
components
Hardware System Improper
cable
connection
with
the mother board or disconnection caused
by
Reconnect the Medium
cable
or
change a new cable
a
broken cable Something
is
wrong with the Comparator 3
reference power supply wrong
Board error
The
TP6
output voltage ≠ 2.5V±0.25V
+5V
power
Low
Something
is
wrong with the
Low
Improper
with
the mother board or disconnection 4
error
error
Voltage of the ＃
VM_CTRL
signal ≥ 0.8V
caused
by
Medium
Control
signals through
Control
signal
error Control
volumetric sensor error
the
Board error
change a new
Low
troubleshooting of
the
drive
board Medium
See No.4 in the table
circuit
error (Q1 or U2 is
Standard voltage (TP5) ≠ 2.5V±0.25V
or
See
is wrong
of
cable cable
a
the mother board
source
the
broken cable
board
5
re-solder
Reconnect the
sent by the drive
Constant current
or
cable
connection
System
Replace U8
rosin jointed.
signal
table
supply.
U8 chip or it is
Control
See No.2 in the
wrong
or
rosin
jointed; resistors R10, R11, R18, R23,
R25
and
R24 is wrong or rosin jointed)
5-114
Medium
Replace
or
re-solder
the
components
Hardware System Adjust VWST, VWSP,
VRST
and VRSP to VWST,
VWSP,
VRST or VRSP are not adjusted
make Medium
well.
the
voltage of the point WT, WP, RT
and
RP
equals Voltage 6
of
the
2.7V±0.1V
Voltage of the
point WT, WP, RT
Board
point WT, WP,
and RP is not the
error
RT and RP ≠
expected value
2.7V±0.1V
to
respectively. Volumetric sensor U15, U21, U16 or U17 is
Low
wrong (or rosin
Replace
or
re-solder
the
components
jointed). Constant current source
of
the
volumetric
Medium
See No.5 in the table
sensor error +5V
power
supply error
Low
D1, D2, D3 or D4 is damaged (or Indicators D1, D2, D3 and D4 are off when 7
Indicator
Board
abnormal
error
fluid flows or are
still
on
when no fluid flows
through
Low
supply error
the
Low
See No.2 in the table
is
wrong with the TP6
change
or
component
power
Something
table Re-solder
rosin jointed) +5V
See No.2 in the
standard
Low
See No.3 in the table
power supply
the volumetric
Voltage
tube
point WT, WP, RT and
of RP
the ≠
Medium
See No.6 in the table
2.7V±0.1V 8
Constant current
Board
Standard
+12V
source error of
error
voltage TP10 ≠
supply error
5-115
power
Low
See No.1 in the table
Hardware System the
vacuum
2.5V±0.25V
C14, R37, U11,
sensor
R47
or
U4
is
damaged
(or
Re-solder Medium
or
change
the
component
rosin jointed). +12V Constant current 9
source error of
Board
the
error
pressure
sensor
power
supply error
Standard voltage TP7 ≠ 2.5V±0.25V
Low
C21, R36, R35, U3
or
U10
is
damaged
(or
See No.1 in the table Re-solder
Medium
or
change
the
component
rosin jointed). +12V Pressure/vacuum 10
unit
+2.5V
reference power
Board error
supply error
power
supply error
Standard voltage TP9 ≠ 2.5V±0.25V
Low
R39, C11, R38, R48, VR9, U9 or U6 is damaged
See No.1 in the table Re-solder
Medium
change
Adjust is
not
adjusted well. Pressure/vacuum 11
1.25V
voltage
error
The
the
component
(or rosin jointed)
VR9
or
VR9,
making Medium
the
relative voltage of the TP9 to TP8
relative
≠
1.250±0.002V
Board
voltage of the
error
TP9 to the TP8
Pressure/vacuum
≠1.250±0.002V
2.5V power
reference supply
Medium
See No.10 in the table
error U6 is damaged or rosin jointed 12
Pressure
output
voltage abnormal
Board
When the input
+12V
error
pressure
is
supply error
0HPa
or
Constant current
the
source error of
450HPa,
output voltage
the
of the point PP
sensor
is not equal to
1.25V
1.250±0.002V
error
5-116
power
pressure voltage
Medium
Replace
or
re-solder
the
components Low
Medium
Medium
See No.1 in the table See No.9 in the table See No.11 in the table
Hardware System or
Adjust PPZ to
2.250±0.002V.
make
the
voltage of the PP
is
1.250±0.002V when the input PPZ or PPG is not adjusted well
pressure is 0. Medium
Then,
adjust
PPG to make the voltage of the
PP
is
1.250±0.002V when the input pressure
is
450HPa. U12, U14, R34, Re-solder
R44, R45, R46, R50, R52, C10 or
Medium
change
or the
component
C23 is damaged (or rosin jointed) 13
Vacuum
output
voltage abnormal
Board
When the input
+12V
error
pressure
is
supply error
0HPa
or
Constant current
the
source error of
-450HPa,
output voltage
the
of the point NP
sensor
is not equal to
1.25V
1.250±0.002V
error
5-117
power
vacuum voltage
Low
Medium
Medium
See No.1 in the table See No.8 in the table See No.11 in the table
Hardware System or
Adjust NPZ to
0.250±0.002V.
make
the
voltage of the NP
is
1.250±0.002V when the input NPZ or NPG is not adjusted well
pressure is 0. Medium
Then,
adjust
NPG to make the voltage of the
NP
is
0.250±0.002V when the input pressure
is
-450HPa. U12, U13, R33, Re-solder
R40, R41, R42, R43, R51, C7 or C22 is damaged (or rosin jointed)
5-118
Medium
change component
or the
Hardware System
5.6 Liquid-level detecting board 5.6.1 Introduction The liquid level board detects the status (sufficient or insufficient) of the LEO(I),LEO(II), LH and cleanser and sends the detected results to the drive board. Principles for the liquid level detecting: the sufficient or insufficient signals detected by the liquid sensor are processed by current-voltage
transferring,
level-transforming
and
de-bouncing.
Finally,
the
drive-board-required TTL level is obtained and outputted.
5.6.2 Board composition Function The liquid level board detects the status (sufficient or insufficient) of the LEO(I),LEO(II), LH and cleanser, transfers the signals and sends them to the drive board.
Block diagram
Figure 5-29 Block diagram of the liquid-level detecting board
Description For the liquid level of the LEO(I), LEO(II), LH and cleanser are detected by the same principle, so the liquid level detection of LEO(I) is used just to be the example.
5-119
Hardware System
Detecting the status (sufficient/insufficient) of LEO(I)
The status (sufficient/insufficient) signals of the LEO(I) detected by the sensor is conducted the I-V converting, level-transforming and de-bouncing by the liquid-level detecting board and then sent to the drive board.
Drive control of the detecting sensors of the four reagents
The working status of the detecting sensors is controlled by the drive board through J1 connector. When the level of the control signal is high, the detecting sensors do not work; when the level is low, the detecting sensors work.
Interface definition The liquid level detecting board has only one connector of 8PIN connecting the drive board. The location of the connector is shown below.
Figure 5-30 Interface definition of the liquid-level detecting board
The definition of pins is shown in the table below. Table 5-79 Pin definition of the liquid-level detecting board
5-120
Hardware System No.
Pin
Signal description
Signal Type
1
D+5V
Digital
+5V power supply
+5V
power
supply 2
＃LIQ1
LEO(I) status output
TTL level
signals 3
＃LIQ2
LEO(II) status output
TTL level
signals 4
＃LIQ3
LH
status
output
TTL level
status
TTL level
signals 5
＃LIQ4
Cleanser output signals
6
/
/
/
7
#D_CTRL
Drive control signals
TTL level
of detecting sensor 8
DGND
Digital ground
/
Assembly drawing
Figure 5-31 Assembly drawing of the liquid-level detecting board-Top
Figure 5-32 Assembly drawing of the liquid-level detecting board-Bottom
5-121
Hardware System
5.6.3 Replacement and Connection Purpose Damaged liquid-level detecting board needs to be replaced by a new one to ensure the operation of the analyzer. Please follow the procedures to have the board replaced.
Tools 107 cross-headed screwdriver 107 flat-headed screwdriver
Disassembly Liquid-level detecting board disassembly consists of the following two main procedures:
Remove the board from the main unit:
1.
Shut down the analyzer.
2.
Open the left door.
3.
Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the 2 cross-headed panhead screws (M4X8) fixing the shielding box, and then remove the shielding cover.
4.
Pull the 4 pipes out from the pipe clamp of the liquid-level detecting board.
5.
Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the 4 cross-headed panhead screws (M3X6) from the liquid-level detecting board.
6.
Pull out the liquid-level detecting board for 30-50mm, unplug the cable connectors on its back, and then remove the board.
5-122
Hardware System
Figure 5-33 Disassemble the liquid-level detecting board-1 1---Cross-recessed
panhead
screw
2---Liquid-level
detecting
board
M3x6 (with washer)
cover
3---Panhead screw M3X8
4---Liquid-level detecting board
shielding
Further disassembly of the drive board
1.
Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the 4 cross-headed panhead screws M3X8 fixing the pipe clamp.
2.
Remove the 2 pipe clamps.
Figure 5-34 Disassemble the liquid-level detecting board-2 1---Cross-recessed panhead screw M3X8
2---Liquid-level detecting board
3---Pipe clamp
5-123
Hardware System
Assembly Assemble the power board as per the above-mentioned steps in the reverse order.
Verification 1.
The liquid-level detecting board is assembled properly.
2.
The tubing is connected properly.
3.
Start up the analyzer properly.Running samples in the whole blood mode. If “No LEO(I) (/LEO(II)/LH /cleanser)” or bubbles are not reported by the analyzer, the replacement is succeeded. If one or more above-mentioned error(s) is reported, you should remove the error accordingly.
5.6.4 Troubleshooting Table 5-80 Troubleshooting the liquid-level detecting board No.
Error name
Error
Error
type
features
Causes
Probability
Improper
with
the mother board disconnection
caused
action
cable
connection or
Recommended
by
Reconnect Medium
the
cable or change a new cable
a
broken cable The voltage 1
+5V power
System
supply error
error
of the +5V test point is not equal to 5V±0.25V.
Improper
power See
supply of the main unit or Improper +5V power supply sent
by
Low
the
troubleshooting of the
drive
board
and power board
mother board L2 is damaged (or rosin jointed) or something wrong
is (rosin
Low
Replace
or
re-solder
the
components
jointed) with the C7 and C11. Comparator 2
reference power
Board error
The
TP1
output voltage
Something wrong
≠
with
is the
+5V power supply.
5-124
Low
See No.1 in the table
Hardware System supply
2.5V±0.25V
wrong
Something wrong
is
with
the
chip U9 or R10 or they
are
Low
rosin
Replace
or
re-solder the U9
jointed. Improper
cable
connection
with
the mother board
3
Control
System
signal error
error
Voltage
of
or
the
＃
caused
disconnection by
Reconnect Medium
the
cable or change a new cable
a
broken cable
D_CTRL signal
≥
Control
signals See
sent by the drive
0.8V
board through the
Low
troubleshooting of the drive board
mother board is wrong Control
signal
error Abnormal driving 4
of
the detecting
Board error
sensor
Voltage
to
Control
ground
of
error (Q1, U1, U2,
See No.3 in the table
circuit
collector
U3
electrode of
wrong
Q1 is not
jointed;
between
R1, R2, R9, R40,
4.4V-5.25V.
R41, R42 or R43
or
Medium
U4 or
are rosin
resistors
Medium
Replace
or
re-solder
the
components
are wrong or rosin jointed). Adjust VL1, VL2,
The voltage of
voltage
point
point VLL1,
VLL1, 5
of
Board
VVL2,
error
VVL3
and
VVL4 is not
VVL4
≠
the
2.2V±0.1V
VVL2, VVL3
and
VL3 and VL4 to VLL1,
make the voltage
VVL2,
VVL3 or VVL4 are
Medium
not adjusted well.
VVL2, VVL3 and VVL4 equals to 2.2V±0.1V respectively.
expected value.
of the point VVL1,
Detecting sensors U1, U2, U3 or U4 are
wrong
rosin jointed).
5-125
(or
Low
Replace
or
re-solder
the
components
Hardware System Abnormal driving of the detecting
Medium
sensor +5V power supply error LED1,
Low
LED2,
LED3 or LED4 are damaged (or rosin
6
Indicator
Board
abnormal
error
Indicators
error
LED1,
Something
LED2,
wrong
with
and
TP1
LED4
are
power supply
the
standard
still
on
voltage of point
when
the
VLL1,
is
filled
with
VVL2,
VVL3 and VVL4 ≠ U7,
off when no
R32, R17, R13,
fluid exists
R14, R18, R21,
in the tube.
R5,
R15,
Low
R4,
Low
Low
Medium
R11,
R30,
R23,
Medium
R25,
rosin jointed).
5.7 Laser Control Board 5.7.1 Introduction The laser control board controls the laser to ensure it is stable and moderate.
5.7.2 Board Composition Function
Constant-laser power controlling
See No.1 in the table See No.2 in the table
See No.5 in the table
Re-solder
are damaged (or
Laser drive current monitoring
the
component
R26, R27 or R28
change
or
R19,
R22, R12, R31,
Power conditioning
table
2.2V±0.1V
fluid or are
See No.2 in the
is
LED3
tube
table
Re-solder
jointed) +5V power supply
See No.4 in the
5-126
change component
or the
Hardware System
Block diagram
Figure 5-35 Block diagram of the laser control board
Description
Power conditioning
The power conditioning module filters the ±12V power sent by the data board. After filtering, the ripple is less than 100mV.
Laser drive current monitoring
The working current of the laser is measured and sent to the data board for monitoring.
Constant-laser power controlling
The laser control board controls the laser by constant-power method. I.e. the laser output power is monitored by the inner photoelectrical detector, and the results obtained forms a closed loop system through negative feedback to ensure the constant-power output. The power is controlled (3mW-5mW) by adjusting the potentiometer VR1 on the board.
Interface definition The laser control board is configured with 2 external connectors. One is the J1 connecting the mother board (connecting data board through the mother board), the other one is the J2 connecting the laser, as the figure shows.
5-127
Hardware System
Figure 5-36 Interface layout of the laser control board
Table 5-81 Definition of J1 (connecting the mother board) PIN 1
Definition AVSS
Note -12V
Direction I/O
Analog
power
Level
I
-12V
Ｏ
０
Ｏ
No greater than 5V
supply 2
AGND
Analog ground
3
LASER
Monitoring
voltage
of
laser drive current 4
AVCC
12V Analog power supply
I
12V
５
#CONTROL
Control signals produced
I/O
Low level: ≤0.8V
by standard voltage
High level: OC door of 5V
6
VCC
5V digital power supply
5-128
I
5V
Hardware System Table 5-82 Definition of J2 (connecting the laser) No.
Name
Note
Direction
Level
I/O 1
LDA
Anode of semi-conductor laser
O
-
I
-
I
-
diode 2
LDC
Cathode of semi-conductor laser diode
3
PDA
Anode of semi-conductor laser receiver
Assembly drawing
Figure 5-37 Assembly drawing of the laser control board
5.7.3 Adjustment and Test Points Adjust the slide rheostat VR1 clockwise, then the resistance of the VR1 connecting circuit, the voltage of the test point TP2VREF and the laser intensity increases. Adjust the slide rheostat VR1 anticlockwise, then the resistance of the VR1 connecting circuit, the voltage of the test point TP2VREF and the laser intensity decreases. Adjust the voltage of TP2VREF to 4.0-4.2V (adjustable as per the situation), then the voltage of TPILD is 1.0-3V (note: the laser works normally). 5-129
Hardware System
Never try to plug or unplug the semi-conductor laser before the power supply is cut off.
Do adjust the slide rheostat gradually increased.
See the test points in the table below and their locations on the board in the assembly drawing. Table 5-83Test points of the laser control board No.
Test
Signal under
point
test
Function
1
A+12V
AVCC
The +12V power from the data board
2
A-12V
AVSS
The -12V power from the data board
3
D5V
VCC
The 5V power from the data board. It enables the upper photocoupler.
Digital 4
AGND
ground
\ on
board 5
TPVREF
VREF
The 2.5V standard voltage produced by the U1 chip. Double
6
TP2VREF
2VREF
voltage
to
ground
of
the
rheostat
sliding-end. It controls the intensity of the laser in direct ratio. The step-down voltage on R1, R21 or R1/R21
7
TPIPD
PDA
caused by the feedback current signals from the photoelectrical receiving part of the laser. The working current signals of the diode part of the laser. It reflexes the working current of the diode
8
TPILD
LASER
part through the voltage of TPILD, detecting whether the laser is working under the expected status.
5.7.4 Assembly and disassembly See Chapter 7 Optical System for details.
5.7.5 Troubleshooting The troubleshooting information of the laser control board is listed in the table below.
5-130
Hardware System Table 5-84 Troubleshooting the laser control board No.
Error
Error Features
Recommended action
Possible Causes Improperly connected
Reconnect the cable or
or disconnected with
change a new cable
the mother board Improper power sent
1
+12V
power
supply error
The voltage of
to the laser control
the A+12V test
board
point exceeds the range of 12V±0.6V
Check and make sure the power sent by the mother board and the data board is proper.
Something is wrong
Check the circuit on the
with
board.
the
power
control circuit on the board.
Grounding
short-circuits.
The
power is lower or higher. Something is wrong
2
-12V
power
supply error
The voltage of
with
the A-12V test
control circuit on the
point exceeds
board.
the range of
short-circuits.
-12V±0.6V
power is lower or
the
power
Grounding The
Check the circuit on the board.
higher.
The voltage of 3
5V
power
supply error
the D5V test point exceeds the range of 5V±0.25V
Improperly connected
Reconnect the cable or
or disconnected with
change a new cable
the mother board Improper
power
is
Check and make sure the
sent
the
laser
power sent by the mother
control board by the
board and the data board
data board or mother
is proper.
to
board.
The voltage of 4
Control signal
the
error
#CONTROL ≤ 0.8V
signal
Improperly connected
Reconnect the cable or
or disconnected with
change a new cable
the mother board Improper
control
Check and make sure the
signals sent by the
signals sent by the mother
data board or mother
board and the data board
board
are proper.
5-131
Hardware System
5
Reference voltage error
The voltage of
First ensure the -12V
Re-solder or change the
TPVREF
power
U1
≠
works
2.5V±0.1V
normally. Then, the
(regards -12V
chip
as reference)
jointed or damaged.
U1
First
is
rosin
ensure
the
TPVREF is normal. Then,
6
the
slide
is
rosin
Laser
The voltage of
rheostat
intensity
TP2VREF
jointed or damaged.
control
abnormal
reference
(should
voltage error
4V-4.1V)
is
Or, be
something
wrong
components
is
with
the
soldering
of
the
operation
amplifier
U2
Re-solder or change the
and
its
peripherals. Laser
diode
damaged
7
or
Re-connect or change the connection
cable,
connected improperly
change the laser diode
or
Laser
The voltage of
5V voltage error
See No.3 in the table
intensity
TPILD
Control signals error
See No.4 in the table and
monitoring
exceeds
or succeeding control
check
signals TPILD
range
circuit error
circuit.
output error
1.0-3V
the of
The
operation
amplifier U3 and its peripherals are rosin jointed or damaged
5-132
the
succeeding
Re-solder or change the components
Hardware System
5.8 Pre-amplification board 5.8.1 Introduction The pre-amplification board conducts the optical-electrical conversion to the two scattered lights (FS-low-angle scattered light; SS-high-angle scattered light) come from the flow cell and amplifies the signals. The amplifying boards of the low-angle signal and the high-angle signal share one PCB. The amplification factor is obtained by soldering the resistors.
5.8.2 Board Composition Function
Power conditioning
Optical-electrical converting
Signal conditioning
Block diagram
Figure 5-38 Block diagram of the pre-amplification board
Description
Power conditioning
The power conditioning module filters the ±12V power sent by the data board. After filtering, the ripple is less than 50mV.
Optical-electrical converting
The optical-electrical converting module converts the optical signals into the electrical signals by the photodiode.
Signal conditioning 5-133
Hardware System The current signals are transferred into the voltage signals through I/V and then sent to the succeeding amplifying-conditioning module for further processing. Then, the data board input required signals are obtained.
Interface definition
The FS/SS pre-amplification board is configured with one external connector respectively, i.e. the J1 connector connecting the mother board (connecting data board through the mother board). The layout of the board is shown below.
Figure 5-39 Interface layout of the pre-amplification board
Table 5-85 Definition of J1 (connecting the mother board) PIN
Definition
Note
1
AGND
Analog ground
2
FS/SS
Pre-amplification
Direction I/O Ｏ board
Level ０ ＜1V
output voltage signals 3
SHELL
Shielding ground
-
0
4
AVSS
A-12V analog power supply
I
-12V±5%
5
AGND
Analog ground
Ｏ
０
6
AVCC
A+12V analog power supply
I
12V±5%
5-134
Hardware System The laser control board is configured with 2 external connectors. One is the J1 connecting the mother board (connecting data board through the mother board), the other one is the J2 connecting the laser.
Figure 5-40 Interface layout of the laser control board
Table 5-86 Definition of J1 (connecting the mother board) PIN
Definition
Note
Direction I/O
Level
1
AVSS
-12V Analog power supply
I
-12V
2
AGND
Analog ground
Ｏ
０
3
LASER
Monitoring
Ｏ
≤5V
voltage
of
laser drive current 4
AVCC
12V Analog power supply
I
12V
５
#CONTRO
Control signals produced
I/O
Low level: ≤0.8V
L
by standard voltage
High level: OC door of 5V
6
VCC
5V digital power supply
5-135
I
5V
Hardware System Table 5-87 Definition of J2 (connecting the laser) No.
Name
Note
Direction
Level
I/O 1
LDA
Anode of semi-conductor laser
O
-
I
-
I
-
diode 2
LDC
Cathode of semi-conductor laser diode
3
PDA
Anode of semi-conductor laser receiver
Assembly drawing
(a) Top
5-136
Hardware System
(b) Bottom Figure 5-41 Assembly drawing of the FS/SS pre-amplification board
5.8.3 Adjustment and Test Points No adjustment components. See the test points in the table below and their location on the board in the assembly drawing. Table 5-88 Test points definition of the pre-amplification board No.
Test
Signal under
point
test Digital
1
AGND
ground
Function \
on
board 2
+12V
AVCC
The +12V power from the data board
3
-12V
AVSS
The -12V power from the data board
4
OUT
OUT
FS/SS pre-amplification board output signals
5
D5V
VCC
The 5V power from the data board. It enables the upper photocoupler.
5.8.4 Disassembly and assembly See Chapter 7 Optical System for details.
5-137
Hardware System
5.8.5 Troubleshooting Table 5-89 Troubleshooting the pre-amplification board No.
Error
Error Features
Possible Causes Improper
The voltage of the
1
test
cable
connection
with the mother board or the
Reconnect the cable or
data board, or disconnection
change a new cable
caused by a broken cable
12V
+12V
point
Improper 12V power sent by
power
exceeds the range of
the data board or mother
supply
12±0.6V;
board
error
ripple
or
the
noise
is
greater than 50mV.
Recommended action
Check whether the proper power supply is sent by the mother board or the data board
Rosin
joint
or
damage
happens to the +12V test point relating inductor L1 or the capacitors C24, C27, C20
Re-solder or change the component
and C23. Improper
The voltage of the
2
cable
connection
with the mother board or the
Reconnect the cable or
data board, or disconnection
change a new cable
caused by a broken cable
-12V
-12V
point
Improper -12V power sent by
power
exceeds the range of
the data board or mother
supply
-12±0.6V;
board
error
ripple
test or
the
noise
is
greater than 50mV.
Rosin
Check whether the proper power supply is sent by the mother board or the data board
joint
or
damage
happens to the -12V test point relating inductor L2 or the capacitors C22, C26, C25 and
Re-solder or change the component
C21. Channel 3
output value error
SS
output
signals
too weak (supposing it is caused only by the circuit problems) FS
output
The FS board is installed in the location of the SS board by mistake. R4, R5 or R6 resistance error,
Re-solder or change the
rosin jointed or damaged
component
signals
The SS board is installed in
too
strong
the location of the FS board
(supposing
it
by mistake.
is
Change the board
5-138
Change the board
Hardware System R4, R5 or R6 resistance error,
Re-solder or change the
rosin jointed or damaged
component
The
The photodiode D1 or R1 is
Re-solder or change the
pre-amplification
rosin jointed or damaged.
component
output signals are
The U2 or U3 is rosin jointed
Re-solder or change the
too
or damaged.
component
board
(FF/SS) weak
to
be
detected. Something is wrong with the band width of pre-amplification board (FF/SS).
the
Check whether the relating resistors and capacitors R4,
Re-solder or change the
R5, R6, C1, C5 and C4 are
component
rosin jointed or damaged.
5-139
Hardware System
5.9 Indicator Board 5.9.1 Introduction The indicator board realizes the function of analyzer status indicating and buzzer alarming.
5.9.2 Board Composition Function
Analyzer working status indicating
Buzzer alarming
Description
Analyzer working status indicating
The indicator board indicates the working status of the analyzer by a two-color indicator. When the system works normally, the indicator displays green. When error happens, the indicator turns red.
Buzzer alarming
The alarming function is realized by the buzzing of the buzzer.
Interface definition The indicator board is configured with one external connector J1.
Table 5-90 Interface definition of the indicator board PIN
Name
Note
Direction
Level
I/O
1
VCC
Power supply
-
+5V
4
FAULT
Error indicator (red)
I
TTL
5
WORK
I
TTL
7
BUZ
Buzzer
I
TTL
8
GND
Ground
-
0
Working
indicator
(green)
5-140
Hardware System
Assembly drawing
Figure 5-42 Assembly drawing of the indicator board
5.9.3 Disassembly and assembly method Purpose Damaged indicator board needs to be replaced by a new one.
Tools 107 cross-headed screwdriver 107 flat-headed screwdriver
Disassembly 1. Shut down the analyzer. 2. Open the front cover assembly. 3. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the 2 tapping screws (PT3X6) fixing the indicator board, and then remove the board.
5-141
Hardware System
Figure 5-43 Disassemble the indicator board 1---Tapping screw (PT3X6)
2---Indicator board
3---Front cover
Verification Turn on the analyzer and start up the PC when finish replacing the indicator board. During the process from “startup self-test” to “ready”, closely observe the indicator and the buzzer, if they work normally, the replacement is successful.
5.9.4 Troubleshooting Table 5-91 Troubleshooting the indicator board No. 1
Error Indicator doesn't work
Causes and recommended action If the indicator could work off and on when you shaking the wiring on the J1 connector, then, it might be caused by the improper connection. If nothing is wrong with the connection and the system works normally, then, the diode of the indicator might be damaged.
2
The buzzer is mute when
If the buzzer could buzz off and on when you shaking the
system alarming.
wiring on the J1 connector, then, it might be caused by the improper connection. If nothing is wrong with the connection or the buzzer buzzes abnormally (e.g. a hoarse buzzing), then, the buzzer might be damaged. 5-142
6
Maintenance
6.1 Maintenance Module and the Corresponding Settings No.
Type
Settings to be reset Re-adjust the position of the sampling assembly
Replace the drive board
1 2
Maintenance
Boards
by software Re-adjust the gains, calibration factors and
Replace the data board
count-related settings
Replace the power board
3 4
Re-conduct the safety test
Replace the volumetric board
Reset the count time and the start signal delay 1. Re-adjust the position of the sampling
Disassemble and assemble the
assembly to the DIFF bath.
DIFF bath assembly or have it
2. If the temperature and the mixing are greatly
upgraded
changed, then re-adjusting the optical gain is
5
necessary. Remove the DIFF bath assembly from
6
the
analyzer
and
then
re-assemble it Mechanism
Replace
to the DIFF bath by software and
disassemble/assemble the front cover
7
Re-adjust the position of the sampling assembly 1. Manually adjust the horizontal position of the mix assembly. 2. Re-adjust the position of the clipper by software. 1. Manually adjust the horizontal position of the
Replace
and
sample feeding assembly.
disassemble/assemble
the
2. Re-adjust the position of the sampling assembly to the sample compartment and the
bottom cover 8 9 10
autoloading position by software. Baths
1. Re-adjust the gains and the calibration factors.
Replace the aperture
2. Reset the count time and the start signal delay. 1. Re-adjust the gains and the calibration factors.
Replace the bath
2. Reset the count time and the start signal delay.
6-1
Maintenance 1. Re-enter the volume of the volumetric tube at the setting screen.
Replace the volumetric tube 11
2. Reset the count time and the start signal delay.
12
Replace HGB The
13 14
Sequence
vacuum
Re-adjust the gain and calibration of HGB. created
in
the
sequence is changed Sample
results
are
Reset the count time and the start signal delay changed
greatly
Re-adjust the gain and the calibration.
6-2
Maintenance
6.2 General You can service the analyzer as per Section 6.2 – 6.6. After repairing, follow the verification procedures to verify the analyzer’s status.
6.3 Disassembling the Panels 6.3.1 Removing the left door Purpose To disassemble the electric and fluidic parts inside the left side of the analyzer, follow this procedure to remove the left door.
Tools 107 flat-headed screwdriver
Removal 1. Power off the analyzer and unplug the power cord 2. Insert 107 the flat-headed screwdriver into the slot of the door lock, and turn the lock tongue 90° counterclockwise. 3. Pull the side door outward from the bottom.
Figure 6-1 Removing the left door
Installation Install the left door as per the above-mentioned steps in the reverse order. 6-3
Maintenance
6.3.2 Removing the right door Purpose To disassemble the electric and fluidic parts inside the right side of the analyzer, follow this procedure to remove the right door.
Tools 107 flat-headed screwdriver
Removal 10. Power off the analyzer and unplug the power cord. 11. Insert 107 flat-headed screwdriver into the slot of the door lock, and turn the lock tongue 90° counterclockwise. 12. Pull the side door outward from the bottom.
Make sure that the power supply is shut off when you remove the right door; otherwise, the analyzer will alarm and stop running.
Figure 6-2 Removing the right door
Installation Install the right door as per the above-mentioned procedures in the reverse order. 6-4
Maintenance
6.3.3 Removing the top cover Purpose To disassemble the optical components, boards, cables and connectors, follow this procedure to remove the top cover.
Tools 107 cross-headed screwdriver
Removal 4. Power off the analyzer and unplug the power cord. 5. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the three M4X8 small panhead screws. 6. Pull out the top cover from back upward.
Figure 6-3 Removing top cover 1 ―――M4X8 small panhead screw
2 ―――top cover
Installation Install the top cover as per the above-mentioned procedures in the reverse order.
6-5
Maintenance
6.3.4 Removing the back panel Purpose To maintain the fluidic connectors and electric circuits at the center of analyzer, follow this procedure to remove the back panel.
Tools 107 cross-headed screwdriver
Removal 1. Power off the analyzer and unplug the power cord. 2. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two M4X8 small panhead screws used for fixing the back panel of power supply。 3. Pull the back panel outward.
Figure 6-4 Removing the back panel of power supply 1 ―――M4X8 small panhead screw
2 ―――back panel of power supply
Installation Install the back panel as per the above-mentioned procedures in the reverse order.
6-6
Maintenance
6.3.5 Removing the front cover assembly Purpose To maintain the fluidic system and syringe inside the front cover, follow this procedure to remove the front cover.
Tools 107 cross-headed screwdriver 107 flat-headed screwdriver
Removal 1. Power off the analyzer and unplug the power cord. 2. Remove the left door as per section 6.3.1 . 3. Remove the right door as per section 6.3.1 . 4. Remove the top cover board as per section 6.3.3 . 5. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the six M4X8 countersunk head screws on the left, right and top side of the front cover. 6. Pull the front cover outward by 30 - 50 mm, and disconnect the indicator connector from the indicator board. 7. Remove the front cover forward.
Figure 6-5 Removing the front cover assembly 6-7
Maintenance 1 ―――M4X8 small panhead screw
2 ―――top cover
3 ―――indicator light board
4 ―――right door
5 ―――M4X8 countersunk head screw
6 ―――front cover assembly
7 ―――left door
Installation Install the front cover as per the above-mentioned procedures in the reverse order.
6-8
Maintenance
6.4 Replacing the Valves, Pumps and Syringes (Reagent container and reagent inlet, waste bump, fluidic valve, pinch valve, syringe)
Figure 6-6 Removing fluidic system inside the left door 1 ―――valve assembly I
2 ―――M4X12 small panhead screws
3 ―――plain washer Ф3
4 ―――M3X12 cross-headed panhead screw (with lock washer)
5 ―――diluent syringe
6 ―――lyse syringe
7 ―――M4X8 small panhead screws
8 ―――pressure chamber
9 ―――air pump
10―――valve assembly II
6-9
Maintenance
Figure 6-7 Removing fluidic system inside the right door 1 ―――valve
2 ―――M3X8 small panhead screw
3 ―――M4X12 small panhead screw
4 ―――vacuum chamber
5 ―――waste pump assembly
6 ―――valve assembly III
7 ―――pinch valve
6-10
Maintenance
Figure 6-8 Removing fluidic system inside the front door 1 ―――valve
2 ―――pressure-leakage valve
3 ―――M3X8 small panhead screw
4 ―――sheath syringe
5 ―――injection syringe
6 ―――sampling syringe
7 ―――plain washer Ф3
8 ―――M3X12 cross-headed panhead screw (with lock washer)
6.4.1 Replacing the valve Purpose In case of malfunction of a valve(s), replace the valve.
Tools 107 cross-headed screwdriver 107 flat-headed screwdriver
6-11
Maintenance
Removal Follow these two procedures to disassemble the valve assemblies.
To remove the valve assembly (valve assembly I, valve assembly II, or valve assembly III)
1. To remove valve assembly I and II, remove the left door (as per section 6.3.1 ); to remove valve assembly III, remove the right door (as per section 6.3.2 ).
2. Disconnect all tubes connected to the valve(s) as shown in Figure 6-6, Figure 6-7, and Figure 6-8.
3. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the M4X12 small panhead screws fastening the valve assembly.
4. Pull the valve assembly, outward and disconnect all lines from the assembly.. 5. Take out valve assembly.
To remove a single valve (including pinch valve, or single valve on the valve assemblies)
1. To remove the valve on the left side, remove the left door. (as per section 6.3.1 ); to remove the valve on the right side, remove the right door. (as per section 6.3.2 ); to remove the valve on the front side, remove the front cover assembly. (as per section 6.3.2 )
2. Disconnect all pipes connected to the valves as shown in Figure 6-6, Figure 6-7, and Figure 6-8. (if a pinch valve needs to be removed, remember to pinch the corresponding tube).
3. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two M3X8 small panhead screws fastening the valve assembly.
4. Pull the valve outward, and disconnect the lines connected to the valve. Then take the valve out.
Figure 6-9 Valve assembly I
6-12
Maintenance
Figure 6-10 Valve assembly II
Figure 6-11 Valve assembly III 1 ―――valve
2 ―――M3X8 small panhead screw
3 ―――valve bracket
Installation Install the valve assembly as per the above-mentioned procedures in the reverse order.
Verification 1. Check the fluidic connections. 2. Power on and verify the installation.
6-13
Maintenance
6.4.2 Replacing the Pressure Chamber Purpose In case of malfunction, replace the pressure chamber.
Tools 107 cross-headed screwdriver 107 flat-headed screwdriver
Removal Follow these two procedures to disassemble the pressure chamber.
To remove the pressure chamber:
1. Remove the left door (as per section 6.3.1 ). 2. Disconnect all tubes connected to the assembly as shown in Figure 6-6. 3. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the four M4X8 small panhead screws. 4. Pull the pressure chamber out.
To disassemble the pressure chamber:
1. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the four M3X12 panhead washer screws, then take out the end cap and mounting plate; 2. Use the 107 flat-headed screwdriver to remove the airproof screw fixed on the end cap, then take out the small O ring (9.5x1.8). 3. Take out the big O ring (48.7x1.8).
6-14
Maintenance
Figure 6-12 Removing pressure chamber 1―――M3X12 cross-headed panhead
2 ―――end cap
screw (with lock washer) 3 ―――O ring 48.7x1.8
4 ―――O ring 9.5 x 1.8
5 ―――airproof screw
6 ―――mounting plate
7 ―――air pressure chamber
Installation Install the pressure chamber as per the above-mentioned procedures in the reverse order.
Verification 1. Check if all parts are correctly assembled and tightened. 2. Check the fluidic connections.. 3. Power on and verify the installation.
6.4.3 Replacing the Vacuum Chamber Purpose In case of malfunction, replace the vacuum chamber.
Tools 107 cross-headed screwdriver 107 flat-headed screwdriver
6-15
Maintenance
Removal Follow these two procedures to disassemble the vacuum chamber.
To remove the vacuum chamber:
1. Remove the right door (as per section 6.3.2 ) 2. Disconnect all tubes connected to the assembly as shown in Figure 6-7. 3. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two M4X12 small panhead screws. 4. Pull vacuum chamber outward.
To disassemble the vacuum chamber:
1. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the four M3X12 panhead washer screws, then take out the end cap and mounting plate. 2. Use the 107 flat-headed screwdriver to remove the air tightening screw fixed on the end cap, then take out the small O ring (9.5x1.8). 3. Take out the big O ring (48.7x1.8).
Figure 6-13 Removing vacuum chamber 1―――M3X12
cross-headed
panhead
2 ―――end cap
screw (with lock washer) 3 ―――O ring (48.7x1.8)
4 ―――O ring (9.5x1.8)
5 ―――airproof screw
6 ―――mounting plate
7 ―――air pressure chamber
Installation Install the vaccum chamber as per the above-mentioned procedures in the reverse order.
6-16
Maintenance
Verification 1. Check if all parts are correctly assembled and tightened. 2. Check the reagent connections. 3. Power on and verify the installation.
6.4.4 Replacing the Syringe Assembly Purpose In case of malfunction, replace the syringe assembly.
Tools 107 cross-headed screwdriver 107 flat-headed screwdriver 2 mm hexagon wrench 2.5 mm hexagon wrench 150 mm monkey wrench
Removal Follow these two procedures to disassemble the syringe.
To remove the syringe assembly
1. To the remove lyse syringe or diluent syringe, remove the left door (as per section 6.3.1 ); to the remove sheath syringe, injection syringe or sampling syringe, remove the front cover assembly (as per section 6.3.4 or 6.3.5 ). 2. Disconnect all tubes connected to the syringe as shown in Figure 6-6 and Figure 6-8. 3. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the four M3X12 panhead washer screws fixing syringe and Ф3 plain washer. . 4. Incline the assembly outward, and pull it out by 30 - 50mm. Disconnect the wire of the motor and the photocoupler, and then take the assembly out. (* Note that the four rubber washers of the syringe should be kept well for reassembly.)
To disassemble the syringe:
1. Remove the lyse syringe, injection syringe, and sample syring
a. To remove the glass syringe unit on the lyse syringe (three 2.5ml syringes on the assembly), remove the left door (as per section 6.3.1 ).
b. To remove the glass syringe unit on the injection syringe or on the sample syringe (250ul and 100ul respectively), remove the front cover (as per section 6.3.4 or 6.3.5 ).
6-17
Maintenance
c. The syringe assembly needs not to be disassembled wholly. Use the 107 flat-headed screwdriver to remove the M4X8 special screw fixing the syringe. Rotate the left glass syringe unit with hand, and then take out the washer of syringe. (as per Figure 6-14).
Apply some glue to the threads. Do not proceed to the next step until the glue is dry.
Figure 6-14 Removing glass syringe unit 1 ―――M4X8 special screw
2 ―――glass syringe unit
3 ―――washer
d. Use the 2.5mm hexagon wrench to remove the two M3X8 socket head screws on the electric switch and remove the switch. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two M3X6 cross-headed panhead screws, and then remove the electric switch (
e. Figure 6-15).
6-18
Maintenance
Figure 6-15 Removing syringe assembly 1――MGN9-C1-R95-Z0CM
Linear
2 ―――syringe slider
rolling guide 3 ―――M3X8 socket head screw
4 ―――43F4J-05-010 linear stepping motor
5 ―――M4X8 retaining screw
6 ―――syringe photocoupler bracket
7 ―――PHOTOELEC Potical Sensor
8 ―――M3X6 cross-headed panhead screw
f. Use 2.5mm hexagon wrench to remove the four M3X8 socket head screws on syringe slider. Use 2 mm hexagon wrench to remove M4X8 retaining screw on syringe slider and remove the syringe slider. Use 2.5 mm hexagon wrench to remove the four M3X8 socket head screws fastening the linear stepping motor , then remove the linear stepping motor (Figure 6-15);
Make sure to insert the retaining screw into the corresponding hole, and apply some glue to the threads.
g. Use 2.5mm hexagon wrench to remove the three M3X8 socket head screws on linear rolling guide, and then remove the linear rolling guide. (*Note: The slider should not be off its guide way.) 2. Remove diluent syringe and sheath syringe (*Note: Two syringes are the same, both being the 12.5ml Mindray syringe.) 6-19
Maintenance
a. To remove the Mindray syringe unit on the diluent syringe, remove the left door (as per section 6.3.1 )
b. To remove the Mindray syringe unit on the sheath syringe, remove the front cover assembly (as per section 6.3.1 or 6.3.5 )
c. The syringe assembly should not be removed wholly. Use the 2.5 mm hexagon wrench to remove the two M3X12 socket head screws on the Mindray syringe unit, and remove the Mindray syringe unit. (Figure 6-16)
Figure 6-16 Removing Mindray syringe unit 1 ―――M3X12 socket head screw 2
2 ―――Mindray syringe unit
d. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the four M3X10 panhead screws. The ceramic plug, flange, lock ring and O ring can be disassembled in the axis direction. (Figure 6-17)
6-20
Maintenance
Figure 6-17 Removing Mindray syringe unit 1 ―――12.5ml ceramic plug
2 ―――M3X10 cross-headed panhead screw
3 ―――12.5ml syringe flange
4 ―――12.5ml syringe lock ring
5 ―――O ring 20X3
6 ―――12.5ml syringe body
Relevant parts should be cleaned up before installation.
Installation Install the Mindray syringe unit as per the above-mentioned procedures in the reverse order.
Verification 1. Check if all parts are correctly assembled and tightened. 2. Check wire conections. 3. Check reagent connections. 4. Power on and verify the installation.
6-21
Maintenance
6.4.5 Replacing the Waste Pump Purpose In case of malfunction, replace the waste pump.
Tools 107 cross-headed screwdriver 107 flat-headed screwdriver 100 mm monkey wrench
Removal Follow these two procedures to disassemble the waste pump.
To remove the waste pump:
1. Power on the analyzer to empty the fluidic system. Power off the analyzer and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet. 2. Remove the right door (as per section 6.3.2 ). 3. Disconnect the four tubes connected to the pump; 4. Disconnect the two wires connected to the pump; 5. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two M4X12 small panhead screws on fastening assembly as shown in Figure 6-7. 6. Move the assembly left, make the fastening hole out of the bolt, and then remove it.
To disassemble the waste pump:
1. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the four M3X8 small panhead screws fixing the pump. 2. Remove the waste pump 3. Use the 100 mm monkey wrench to remove the three nuts and take out the three washers. 4. Remove the pump mounting plate. 5. Remove three shock pads via hand.
6-22
Maintenance
Figure 6-18 Removing waste pump 1 ―――M3X8 small panhead screws
2 ―――rotary pump
3 ―――pump mounting plate
4 ―――8-32UNC-2B nut
5 ―――GB93 4 washer
6 ―――shock pad
7 ―――bracket
Installation Install the waste pump as per the above-mentioned procedures in the reverse order.
Verification 1. Check if all parts are correctly assembled and tightened. 2. Check the electrical connection of the rotatory pump. 3. Check the reagent connections. 4. Power on and verify the installation.
6-23
Maintenance
6.5 Replacing the Bath/Aperture Assembly Purpose In case of malfunction of the WBC or RBC reaction bath assembly, replace the corresponding assembly.
Tools 107 cross-headed screwdriver 107 flat-headed screwdriver
Removal 1. Power on the analyzer to empty the fluidic system. Power off the analyzer and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet. 2. Remove the left door (as per section 6.3.1 ). 3. Remove the right door (as per section 6.3.1 ). 4. Remove the top cover (as per section 6.3.1 ). 5. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two M3X6 cross-headed washer screws on the top cover of data board shielding box, and then remove the top cover. (Figure 6-19) 6. Disconnect the bath signal lines of the WBC reaction bath or RBC reaction bath that needs to be removed, and then loosen all buckles fastening the lines in the direction of wiring, until the wire is drawn to the bath. 7. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove M3X8 small panhead screw on bath shield and take it out, then remove the shield. (Figure 6-20) 8. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two M3X8 small panhead screws on bath presser and take it out, then remove the bath presser. (Figure 6-20) 9. Pull the bath out with a distance of about 50-80 mm. Disconnect all tubes connected to the bath. Get the signal wire from wire-protective ring and then remove the bath assembly.
6-24
Maintenance
Figure 6-19 Removing signal lines of bath 1 ―――M3X6 cross-headed panhead
2 ―――top cover of data board shielding box
washer screw 3 ―――data board
Figure 6-20 Removing bath assembly 1 ―――shielding plate
2 ―――WBC bath
3 ―――bath presser
4 ―――M3X8 small panhead screw
5 ―――RBC bath
6 ―――shield cover
7 ―――isolation chamber clamp
8 ―――isolation chamber 6-25
Maintenance
Installation Install the bath assembly as per the above-mentioned procedures in the reverse order.
Verification 1. Check if all parts are mounted to the former position and are fastened. 2. Check if the connection of signal lines of WBC or RBC is correct or not. 3. Check if the connection of power line and reagent pipe is correct or not. 4. Power on and verify the installation.
6-26
Maintenance
6.6 Replacing the Sampling Module and Adjusting Position 6.6.1 Replacing the Sample Probe and Wipe Purpose To remove or replace the sample probe and probe wipe, follow the steps in this section.
Tools
107 cross-headed screwdriver (107X75)
Replace parts according to requirements:
Probe wipe open vial sample probe / piercing needle metal wipe clip sample probe presser
Preparation 1. Power off the analyzer if it is running. 2. Turn off the main power switch on the right side of the analyzer and unplug the power cord. 3. Remove the right door (as per section 6.3.2 ). 4. Move the sampling module to the back of analyzer.
Removal 1. Remove the probe wipe from the sampling module (Figure 6-21)
a. Disconnect the two tubes from the probe wipe. b. Pull the wipe downward to remove the probe wipe, as indicated by the arrow in the figure below, and remove the wipe clip.
c. Separate the wipe from sampling module in the direction of arrow d. Get out the inlet and outlet pipe from the wipe.
6-27
Maintenance
Figure 6-21 Removing wipe 1 ―――pipe clamp
2 ―――presser under the guiding rod
3 ―――probe wipe
4 ―――wipe clip
2. Remove the sample probe from the sampling module. (Figure 6-22)
a. Pull out the sample aspiration tube from the above of sample probe. b. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to remove the retaining screw (M3X8 small panhead screw) on probe presser, and take out the fixing flake.
c. Get out the probe from sideward.
6-28
Maintenance
Figure 6-22 Removing sample probe
1 ―――slider
2 ―――sample probe
3 ―――presser
4 ―――M3X8 small panhead screw
When remove the sample probe, get probe wipe out of the presser under guiding rod. The probe tip may contain biohazardous materials. Exercise caution when handling it and keep it to the right position.
Installation To install a new sample probe and wipe, repeat the above “removal” step 1 or 2 in the reverse order.
6.6.2 Replacing the Optical Sensor Purpose To remove or replace the optical sensor, follow the steps in this section.
6-29
Maintenance
Tools
107 cross-headed screwdriver（107X75）
Replace parts according to requirements:
Sensor module on motor position（3003-21-34925） Photocoupler fixer
Preparation 1. Power off the analyzer and unplug the power cord. 2. Turn off the main power switch on the right side of the analyzer and unplug the power cord. 3. Remove the right door (as per section 6.3.2 ).
Removal 1. Remove the vertical optical sensor module (Figure 6-23)
a. Disconnect the connector of the sensor to be replaced ( not shown in the figure). b. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to remove the M3x6 screw on the sensor. c. Remove the sensor module from the bracket.
Figure 6-23 Removing vertical optical sensor 1 ―――M3x6 cross-headed screw
2 ―――sensor module on motor position
3 ―――bracket 2. Remove the horizontal optical sensor module (Figure 6-24) 6-30
Maintenance
a. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to remove the M3x6 screw on the photocoupler presser to be replaced
b. Gently pull out the photocoupler presser (with the sensor module on motor position) from the sample mother board and get out the plug of sensor module from the corresponding hole.
c. Disconnect the sensor connector (not shown in figure). Take out the photocoupler presser and the sensor module on motor position.
d. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to remove the M3x6 screw fixing the sensor module. Separate the photocoupler presser from the sensor module on the motor position.
Figure 6-24 Removing optical sensor on horizontal position
Installation To install a new optical sensor, repeat the above “removal” step 1 or 2 in the reverse order.
6.6.3 Removing the Sampling Module Purpose To remove the sampling module, follow steps in this section.
Tools
107 cross-headed screwdriver (107X75)
wire cutter
Replace parts according to requirements: 6-31
Maintenance Sampling module
Preparation 1. Power off the analyzer. 2. Trun off the main power switch on the right side of the analyzer and unplug the power cord. 3. Move the analyzer to turn its right side outward, and expose the back side as much as possible. 4. Open the back cover of the analyzer (as per section 6.3.2 ) 5. Remove the right side door (as per section 6.3.2 ) 6. Move the sampling module to the back of the analyzer.
Removal 1. Disconnect all tubes from on the sampling module, and cut the binding belt with the wire cutter. Remove the tubes from the whole sampling module. 2. Disconnect all the connectors of the vertical part of sampling module, and unplug the connector from the motor directly. 3. Disconnect all the connectors of the horizontal part of sampling module from the space left by opened back cover at the back of the analyzer. (BC-5300 has four connectors, and BC-5380 has five connectors). Unplug the connectors from the motor directly. 4. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two M3X8 small panhead screws fixing the joint. 5. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to remove the four M4X12 cross panhead screws fixing the sampling module. 6. Hold the sampling module and move it gently outward. Pull out the optical sensor module from corresponding hole with caution. Be careful not to damage or break the line. 7. Check if all connectors of optical sensor module are drawn out from the corresponding holes, then hold out the sampling module.
6-32
Maintenance
Figure 6-25 Removing the sampling module 1 ―――M3X8 small panhead screw
2 ―――link
3 ―――spacer
4 ―――sampling module
5 ―――M4X12 panhead screw
Watch for the sampling probe when removing sampling module. If necessary, remove sampling probe first as introduced in section 6.6.1 to avoid potential biologic pollution.
6-33
Maintenance
Installation To replace new sampling module, repeat the above step 1 to 7 in the reverse order.
6.6.4 Adjusting sample probe position Purpose Adjust the sample probe position at the DIFF bath as per the following procedures.
Tools Sample probe locating clamp
Preparation 1. Turn on the main unit. 2. Start up the PC, and then start the software by clicking the icon on the desktop.
Adjusting sample probe position
1. Click “MENU” → “Service” → “Debug” to enter the “Debug” screen. Put the DIFF locating clamp in the aperture of the DIFF bath. 2. Click “DIFF Bath Position”, and then click “Start” to move the sample probe onto the DIFF bath.
Figure 6-26 Start adjusting 3. Click “Left”, “Right”, “Up” and “Down” to adjust the sample probe, making it inserts in the position in front of the round slot, as shown in Figure 6-27. Then, click “Stop” to save the position of the sample probe. 6-34
Maintenance
Figure 6-27 Adjusting the sample probe position 4. Click “Ok” to finish adjusting the sample probe position at the DIFF bath.
6.7 Maintaining and Replacing the DIFF Reaction Bath Purpose To remove DIFF reaction bath, follow steps in this section.
Tools
107 cross-headed screwdriver (107X75)
wire cutter
Replace parts according to requirements:
DIFF reaction bath
Preparation 1. Power off the analyzer. 2. Turn off the main power switch on the right side of the analyzer and unplug the power cord. 3. Remove the right side door (as per section 6.3.2 )
Removal 1. Use the wire cutter to cut off the binding belts fixing the tubes and remove them from the DIFF bath assembly. 2. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two M4X8 small panhead screws fixing the DIFF bath assembly. 3. Hold the DIFF bath assembly and move it gently outward. Expose the connectors and pipe 6-35
Maintenance connectors at the back side, and then disconnect them. 4. Take out the DIFF bath assembly.
Figure 6-28 Removing DIFF bath assembly 1 ―――DIFF bath assembly
2 ―――M4X8 small panhead screw
Installation To replace new DIFF bath assembly, repeat the above removal step 1 to 4 in the reverse order.
6-36
7
Optical System
7.1 Optical System Adjustment and Troubleshooting Purpose To replace and repair the optical system component in case of malfunction.
Tools Antistatic gloves Hexagon wrench Cross-headed screwdriver Flat-headed screwdriver Horologic driver Duke (4K-07) 7μm standard particles Oscilloscope or oscillometer
Removal and installation Before removing the optical system component, remove the right side door and the top cover of the analyzer first (refer to Chapter 6 Maintenance), then remove all the screws on them, as Figure 7-1 shows. Remove the protective cover of the optical system. After component installation, reinstall the protective cover and secure it. The above-mentioned steps will not be repeated in the following procedures.
7-1
Optical System
Screw s
Figure 7-1 Remove the protective cover of the optical system
7.2 Removing and Installing Optical System Assemblies The optical system consists of the following assemblies: the front light assembly, flow cell assembly, rear light collimator assembly, beam splitter assembly, rear light collector assembly, and rear light detector assembly.
Wear antistatic gloves when removing boards.
Be sure to turn off the analyzer and disconnect the power cord before removing boards.
Do not plug/unplug the laser generator unless the power cord is disconnected. Otherwise, the laser generator will be damaged.
7.2.1 Laser driver board The laser driver board supplies power to the laser generator and controls the output power of the laser. 1. Turn off the analyzer, open the laser cover and remove the connecting line from the driver board. 7-2
Optical System 2. Remove the fixing screws, and remove the laser driver board support. 3. Replace the laser driver board and reinstall it in the reverse order, then secure the fixing screws.
Figure 7-2 Laser driver board installation 1——fixing screws of laser driver board
2——fixing screws of laser driver board
support
7.2.2 Front light assembly The front light assembly generates the laser beam that enters the flow cell. Remove and install the assembly strictly as instructed below. See Figure 7-3 for the assembly drawing. 1. Turn off the analyzer and disconnect its power cord. 2. Disconnect the laser power connector from the laser control board. Disconnect the heater, temperature sensor and over temperature protection switch connectors. 3. Use the hexagon wrench to remove the fixing screws at the two sides of the front light assembly and remove the assembly. 4. Use the hexagon wrench and the cross-headed screwdriver to remove the screws fixing the laser generator assembly and the cylindrical mirror assembly separately, and then remove the assemblies from the front light guide assembly.
7-3
Optical System
Figure 7-3 Front light assembly 1——Laser assembly
3——Cylindrical mirror assembly
2——Front guide assembly 5. According to the malfunction of the front light assembly, replace the whole laser assembly or the whole cylindrical mirror assembly, install the new one on the front light assembly and secure the assembly to the optical support. 6. Reconnect the laser power connector, heater, temperature sensor and the connector of the over temperature protection switch.
7.2.3 Flow cell assembly The flow cell assembly is used to create a stable sheath fluid flow, which enables the particle tested to pass through the flow cell in a certain speed and to interact with the incident laser to create scattered light. Remove and install the flow cell assembly strictly as instructed below. 1. Power on the analyzer to empty the fluidic pipes, then power off the analyzer and disconnect the power cord. 2. Disconnect the sheath charging tube, sample charging tube and waste outlet tube (at the outlet of the flow cell). Use the hexagon wrench to remove the two fixing screws and take out the flow cell assembly carefully, as Figure 7-4 shows.
7-4
Optical System
Figure 7-4 Flow cell fluidic connecting tube 1―――Sample charging tube
2―――Sheath charing tube
3. Use the hexagon wrench to remove the two connecting screws and divide the flow cell assembly into two parts: rectifier assembly and detecting assembly, as Figure 7-5 shows. 4. Clean or replace the detecting assembly and liquid transporting assembly as needed.
Figure 7-5 Flow cell structure 1——Rectifier assembly
3——Detecting assembly
2——O ring
4——Hexagon screw
5. Install the flow cell assembly as stated above in the reverse order.
7-5
Optical System
7.2.4 Rear light collimator assembly The rear light collimator assembly collects the scattered light created by the particle tested and allows the light to be tested by the rear light detector assembly. Remove the rear light collimator assembly strictly as instructed below. See Figure 7-6 for the assembly drawing of the rear light collimator assembly. 1. Power off the analyzer and disconnect its power cord. 2. Use the hexagon wrench to remove the fixing screws at two sides of the rear light assembly and remove the assembly. 3. Use the hexagon wrench to remove the two screws fixing the diaphragm lens assembly to remove the lens assembly.
Figure 7-6 Rear light collimator assembly 1―――Diaphragm lens assembly
2―――Rear light guide assembly
4. Install the new rear light diaphragm lens assembly on the rear light guide assembly to form a new rear light collimator assembly. Ensure that the superface edge of the diaphragm lens assembly parallels the end face edge of backward oriented assembly. Install and secure the assembly to the optical support.
7.2.5 Beam splitter assembly The beam splitter assembly splits the scattered light into two paths: one for the forward low angle PD assembly and the other for the forward high angle PD assembly. See Figure 7-7 for the assembly drawing of the beam splitter assembly. 1. Power off the analyzer and disconnect its power cord. 2. Use the hexagon wrench to remove the fixing screws at two sides of the beam splitter assembly and remove the assembly. 3. Use the flat-headed screwdriver to remove the two clamping rings. Use the cross-headed 7-6
Optical System screwdriver to remove the screws at the top board and the side boards to remove the boards. 4. Remove the two protective washers to remove the beam-splitting prism. 5. When replacing or installing a new beam-splitting prism, pay attention to the direction of the prism (see Figure 7-7 ). Install the prism following steps above in the reverse order.
Figure 7-7 Beam splitter assembly 1——Base of spectroscope
4——Clamping ring
2——Side board
5——Washer
3——Top board
6——Beam-splitting prism
7.2.6 Rear light collector assembly The rear light collector assembly enhances the collection efficiency by focusing the scattered light, which has passed the beam splitter assembly, on the PD detecting target. It consists of a LAS assembly and a MAS assembly.
LAS assembly
1. Power off the analyzer and disconnect its power cord. 2. Use the hexagon wrench to remove the two fixing screws on the LAS assembly and remove the LAS assembly from the optical support. 3. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two screws fixing the low angle diaphragm and remove the diaphragm. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two screws fixing the rear light focus lens assembly and remove the assembly.
7-7
Optical System
Figure 7-8 LAS assembly 1——Low angle diaphragm
2——Rear light focus lens assembly
4. Install and secure the low angle diaphragm and the rear light focus lens assembly as needed. 5. Install the LAS assembly to the optical support and screw it with the hexagon wrench. During securing, ensure that the diaphragm assembly is close to the M4 hexagon screws.
MAS assembly
1. Power off the analyzer and disconnect its power cord. 2. Use the hexagon wrench to remove the two screws fixing the MAS assembly and then remove the MAS assembly from the optical support. 3. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two screws fixing the diaphragm and then remove the diaphragm. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two screws on the rear light focus lens assembly and then remove the assembly.
Figure 7-9 MAS assembly 1——High angle diaphragm
2——Rear light focus lens assembly 7-8
Optical System
4. Install and secure the diaphragm and the rear light focus lens assembly as needed. 5. Install the MAS assembly to the optical support and screw it with the hexagon wrench. During securing, ensure that the diaphragm assembly is close to the M4 hexagon screws.
7.2.7 Rear light detector assembly The rear light detector assembly detects the scattered light signal and converts it into electrical signals for further processing. It consists of two parts: a forward low angle PD assembly and a forward middle low angle PD assembly.
Forward low angle PD assembly
1. Power off the analyzer and disconnect its power cord. 2. Use the hexagon wrench to remove the screws fixing the forward low angle PD assembly and then remove the assembly from the optical support. 3. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two screws fixing the PD board and remove the shielding box from the forward low angle PD assembly.
Figure 7-10 Forward low angle PD assembly 1——Shielding box
3——PD
2——Low angle pre-amplification board
4——PD cover
4. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to loosen the low angle pre-amplification board, remove the PD board, replace the corresponding parts and reinstall them orderly. 5. Assemble the shielding box to the forward low angle PD assembly and then install the forward low angle PD assembly to the optical support.
Forward middle low angle PD assembly
1. Power off the analyzer and disconnect its power cord. 7-9
Optical System 2. Use the hexagon wrench to remove the screws fixing the forward middle low angle PD assembly and remove the assembly from the optical support. 3. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two screws fixing the PD board and then remove the shielding box from the forward middle low angle PD assembly.
Figure 7-11 Forward middle low angle PD assembly 1——Shielding box
3——PD
2——High angle pre-amplification board
4——PD cover
4. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to loosen the low angle pre-amplification board, remove the PD cover and the PD board, replace the corresponding parts and install them orderly. 5. Assemble the shielding box to the forward middle low angle PD assembly and then install the forward middle low angle PD assembly to the optical support.
Pre-amplification board
1. Power off the analyzer and disconnect its power cord. 2. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to loosen the two screws securing the PD board, and remove the shielding box from the PD assembly. 3. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to remove the pre-amplification board from the PD assembly and replace it with a new pre-amplification board, then reinstall it orderly. Note: The rear light PD assembly needs not to be removed from the optical system during the replacement of the pre-amplification board assembly.
7-10
Optical System
7.3 Adjustment Any assembly in the optical system should be adjusted after the installation once it has been disassembled. The adjustment procedure can be simplified according to how the assembly has been disassembled. The adjustment to the optical system consists of coarse adjustment and fine tuning. Coarse adjustment roughly aligns every optical assembly and makes them approximately on the same optical axis, so that the signal can be created rapidly when standard particles are run. Fine tuning ensures the best position of the optical system. An oscilloscope is used to observe the signal waveform and the corresponding optical assembly position is finely tuned so that the signal generated meets the adjustment standard.
7.3.1 Coarse adjustment According to each optical assembly, the coarse adjustment can be divided into: front light assembly adjustment, flow cell adjustment, rear light collimator assembly adjustment, rear light collector assembly diaphragm adjustment and backward detecting PD assembly adjustment.
Front light assembly adjustment
Purpose:
Horizontally, the beam is upright to the rear light collimator lens. The collimator emergent far field spot is in the vertical direction.
Principle:
The laser beam distributes symmetrically along the optical axis; the reflex fully covers the incident light when the light enters vertically.
Procedure:
Install the rear light assembly first, and cling the rear light assembly closely to the pin stop at the rear light position, as Figure 7-12 shows. Aim the pin stop of the front light assembly at the optical support, secure the fixing screw (make sure the forward optical system attaches the optical support and is still movable). Turn on the power of the laser, and turn the laser assembly to make the far field spot of the emitting laser vertical. Attach the rear light collimator assembly to the pin stop, use a hexagon wrench to check whether the light reflected from the surface of the rear light collimator lens is on the same axis with the incident light and slowly turn the front light assembly to make them on the same axis, and then secure the assembly, as Figure 7-13 shows.
7-11
Optical System
Figure 7-12 Rear light assembly installation
Figure 7-13 Front light assembly adjustment
7-12
Optical System
Flow cell adjustment
Purpose:
Adjusting the flow cell to irradiate the incident light to the surface of the flow cell vertically.
Principle:
That the flow cell is vertical to the incident laser uses the principle of that the reflex fully covers the incident light when the light enters vertically.
Procedure:
Turn the flow cell into the optical path (do not position the square aperture detection area in the optical path). Use a hexagon wrench to check whether the light reflected from the flow cell surface is on the same axis with that of the incident light and adjust the flow cell slowly to harmonize them and then secure the flow cell.
Figure 7-14 Flow cell coarse adjustment
Rear light collimator assembly adjustment Rear light horizontal position adjustment
Purpose:
To make sure the front and the rear light is on the same axis approximately.
Principle:
The beam that goes through the main point of the lens will not change the transmitting direction.
Procedure:
1. Remove the rear light collimator assembly; check whether the beam spot that passes through the beam-splitting prism and the diaphragm on the MAS assembly is symmetrical. Adjust the MAS assembly to make the beam spot symmetrical, as shown in Figure 7-15.
7-13
Optical System
Figure 7-15 Adjustment of the horizontal position of the rear light collimator assembly 2. Move horizontally the rear light collimator assembly along the pin stop and observe the beam spot position on the diaphragm of the MAS assembly. When the spot is in the center of the diaphragm (as shown in Figure 7-16), secure the fixing screw of the rear light collimator assembly.
Figure 7-16 The adjustment of the horizontal position of the rear light collimator assembly is finished
The rear light assembly must cling to the pin stop when it is moved.
Rear light collection assembly adjustment LAS assembly diaphragm adjustment
Purpose: 7-14
Optical System To obtain the effect of selecting low angle scattered light by positioning the LAS assembly diaphragm symmetrically along the light axis.
Procedure:
1. Place a piece of white paper with rough surface at the back of the LAS assembly diaphragm, and adjust the horizontal adjusting screw cap until the spot is symmetrical horizontally (as shown in Figure 7-17). 2. Adjust the vertical adjusting screw cap until the spot is symmetrical vertically (as shown in Figure 7-17).
Figure 7-17 Adjustment of the LAS assembly diaphragm MAS assembly diaphragm adjustment
Purpose:
To obtain the effect of selecting middle low angle scattered light by positioning the MAS assembly diaphragm symmetrically along the light axis. Note: After the adjustment of the horizontal position of the rear light collimator assembly is finished, the position adjustment of the MAS assembly diaphragm is finished. You can secure the fixing screw.
Rear light detector assembly adjustment Forward low angle PD assembly adjustment
Purpose:
To ensure the scattered light from the forward low angle is completely collected by the PD.
Procedure:
Adjust the horizontal and vertical positions of the forward low angle PD assembly until the center of the spot emitted from the LAS assembly diaphragm is completely received by the 7-15
Optical System aperture (as shown in Figure 7-18).
Figure 7-18 Adjustment of the forward low angle PD assembly 1―――Aperture diaphragm of eliminating
2―――Low angle beam spot
veiling glare Forward middle low angle PD assembly adjustment Adjust the forward middle low angle PD assembly in the same way as adjusting the forward low angle PD assembly. Ensure that the center of the emitted spot is completely received by the aperture (as shown in Figure 7-19).
Figure 7-19 Spot from the forward middle low angle PD assembly 1―――Aperture diaphragm of eliminating veiling glare The above description is a complete procedure of coarse adjustment. By the adjustment above, each assembly is roughly positioned symmetrically along the light axis. The following describes the fine tuning of the optical system.
7-16
Optical System
7.3.2 Preparation before fine tuning Adjustment of the horizontal position of the flow cell Before fine tuning, the detecting square aperture of the flow cell should be turned into the optical path. Check the MAS assembly diaphragm. When the sideline shades of the square aperture distribute symmetrically on the diaphragm, the flow cell is turned into the optical path, as shown in Figure 7-20.
Figure 7-20 Flow cell position adjustment 1——Flow cell horizontal adjusting knob
Adjustment of diaphragm against direct light After the flow cell horizontal position adjustment is finished, turn the diaphragm against direct light into the center of the optical path, so that the light intensity shielded by the diaphragm is the largest and brightest. The following two methods show how to judge whether the diaphragm is right in this position.
Visual check method:
Place a card (with a drawing line on it) on the MAS assembly diaphragm so that the two sideline shades of the flow cell distribute symmetrically along the drawing line, as shown in Figure 7-21. Adjust the position of the diaphragm against direct light. When the shielded spot distributes symmetrically along the drawing line, the adjustment is finished.
7-17
Optical System
Figure 7-21 Visual check method
1―――Beam spot
3―――Drawing line
2―――Inner aperture of the flow cell
4―――High angle diaphragm
DC background method:
Output the pre-amplification board TPOUT test point of the forward low angle PD assembly (or the TP43 LASIN test point connected to the signal processing board) to the oscilloscope and select DC gear. Adjust the position of the diaphragm against direct light until minimum LAS DC background is obtained, and then the adjustment is finished. After the adjustment, secure the two screws of the diaphragm against direct light (as shown in Figure 7-22).
Figure 7-22 Diaphragm against direct light 1——Lock screw of the diaphragm against direct light
7-18
Optical System
7.3.3 Fine tuning The purpose of fine tuning is to ensure the optical system is in the optimal position when it detects the scattered light signal from the designed angle. The fine tuning purpose mainly consists of the following three parts: (1) to focus the laser on the cell flow; (2) To ensure that the center of the sample flow basically covers the spot center; and (3) To adjust the scattered light of the rear light assembly from the designed angle. Therefore, the tuning is mainly on the forward optical system axial position, the flow cell horizontal position and the position of the rear light collimator assembly. Before the particle adjustment, at the “Main”→ “Menu”→ “Setup”→ “Gain” screen, set the values of SS and FS to be 100.
Adjustment of front light assembly axial position
Purpose:
Ensure that the laser beam focus is on the cell flow.
Procedure:
1. Test the voltage of the tp2vref test point of the laser control board to see whether the voltage reaches 4V. If not, adjust the variable resistance of the laser control board until the voltage is 4V. 2. Output the pre-amplification board TPOUT test point of the forward low angle PD assembly to the oscilloscope channel 1 (CH1), set the oscilloscope to be: voltage 50mv/div, time 500ns/div and AC coupling. 3. Adopt standard particles as sample for test. Add 3 drops of Duke (4K-07) 7μm standard particles into a 1.5mL centrifugal tube, and then add diluent or deionized water into the centrifugal tube to 1mL. Use the diluted standard particle solution within 3 hours. 4. Run the standard particles in the open-vial mode normally, check the signal in the oscilloscope channel 1 and adjust the adjusting knob of the front light assembly (as shown in Figure 7-23) in the axial position. When the maximum signal amplitude and stability is obtained and distributes normally, the pulse width is the narrowest and about 1.3us, as shown in Figure 7-24, secure the fixing screws of the front light guide assembly.
7-19
Optical System
Figure 7-23 Fine tuning of the front light axial position 1――Front light axial adjustment knob
2——laser axial adjustment lock screws
Figure 7-24 Standard particle signal graph output by forward optical system Note: The sampling time of the DIFF channel is about 20s. To simplify the adjustment and generate signals quickly, you can adjust the forward optical axis adjusting knob in advance until the distance between the front end surface of the front light guide assembly and that of the guide assembly support is about 4mm.
Fine tuning of the rear light collimator assembly
Purpose:
To ensure that what the PD assembly detects is the scattered light signals of the designed collection angles.
Procedure:
1. Output the pre-amplification board TPOUT test point of the forward middle low angle PD 7-20
Optical System assembly (or the TP44 MASIN test point connected to the signal processing board) to the oscilloscope channel 2 (CH2), set the oscilloscope to: voltage 100mv/div, time 500ns/div and AC coupling. 2. Run standard particles in the open vial mode normally, adjust the adjusting knob of the rear light collimator assembly and check the signal pulses of the oscilloscope channel 2. Secure the set screws of the rear light collimator assembly when the pulse peaks reach the maximum value, the signal are stable and the shake is little. 3. Switch to the channel 1 (CH1) and check whether the signal peaks are 190mv±10mv. If not, adjust the adjustable resistance on the laser control board until the signal peaks of the CH1 are 190mv±10mv. 4. Check whether the signal peaks of the channel 2 (CH2) are about 800mv. If not, adjust the adjusting knob of the rear light collimator assembly and confirm whether the pulse signal peaks of the CH2 are at the maximum.
Fine tuning of the flow cell horizontal position
Purpose:
To ensure that the center of the sample flow is positioned in the center of the beam spot.
Procedure:
1. Run standard particles in the open vial mode, and check whether the signal peaks of the oscilloscope channel 1 (CH1) are stable and shake little. 2. Adjust the flow cell horizontal position until the particle signal peaks displayed on the oscilloscope are at the maximum and uniform.
Figure 7-25 Adjustment of the flow cell horizontal position 1―――Horizontal adjusting knob of the flow cell
7-21
Optical System
3. Step 3: After the test, standard particles scattergrams will be obtained, as shown in Figure 7-26:
Figure 7-26 Standard particles scattergrams
Click the “Optical” in the “Review” menu to enter the “Optical” screen (the default screen is the DIFF channel calculation screen), then click “Calculate” to obtain the particle scattergram parameters of the DIFF channel and then check whether the parameters meet the following standards: MAS 0.1max width < 12 LAS 0.1max width < 11 4. Step 4: When all the standard particle parameters meet the standards above, secure the flow cell lock screws (as shown in Figure 7-27) and secure the protective cover of the optical system.
Figure 7-27 the secured flow cell 1―――Lock screws of the flow cell
7-22
Optical System Now, the adjustment of the optical system is finished.
7.3.4 Gain setup After the optical system adjustment, you need to reset the DIFF channel gains. The gain setup consists of two steps:
Standard particle calibration At the count screen, ensure that the WBC background is under 0.1, and then run the 7 μm standard particles in the open vial mode normally. (If the WBC background exceeds the limit, please clean the flow cell or do a background check). After the test, Click the “Optical” in the “Review” menu to enter the “Optical” screen (the default screen is the DIFF channel calculation screen), and then click “Calculate” to obtain the particle scattergram parameters of the DIFF channel.
Figure 7-28 Optical system output standard particle signal
Enter into the Peak target boxes: LAS 26 MAS 117 Calculate
the
gains,
enter
the
gains
into
the
corresponding
boxes
of
the
“Main”→”Setup”→”Gain” screen and save the results according to the prompt on the screen. After the gain setup, retest the 7μm standard particles to verify the gain. The gain of the DIFF channel should be LAS 26±1 and MAS 117±2.
Sample verification After the above standard particle gain setup is finished, get several normal fresh blood samples for test. The scattergram of a normal fresh blood sample should be like the images shown in Figure 7-29:
7-23
Optical System
Figure 7-29 Scattergram of a normal fresh blood sample If the WBC scattergram results of the normal fresh blood samples are significantly different from the figure above, please check whether the reagents, reaction system and the fluidic system work normally.
7-24
Optical System
7.4 Troubleshooting 7.4.1 Laser spot-deviation The SS and FS gain setup is not changed during the use of the analyzer. Yet the scattergram is compressed to the left down side, namely, the two signals collecting angle direction turn smaller, as shown in Figure 7-30. This is mainly because the focusing spot at the flow cell position move forward or backward, causing the diminishment of laser intensity.
Figure 7-30 Compressed scattergram
Settlement: Make standard particle fist, and record the peak value position of standard particle. Loose the laser axial adjustment lock screws (as shown in Figure 7-20). Turn the adjustment screw of front light assembly counterclockwise for a quarter turn. Make standard particle and see the peak value position. If the peak value position becomes greater, keep turning the adjustment screw counterclockwise with 1/8 circle each time till the peak value position becomes smaller, then turn back with 1/8 circle. If the peak value position becomes smaller, turn the adjustment screw in the reverse order with the same method. After finding the maximum position of standard particle, lock the laser axial adjustment fixing screws.
7.4.2 Flow cell clog This is because a big blood clot or impurity blocks the flow cell or sampler inlet, which makes the sheath flow unable to form. The scattergram is accordingly abnormal and scattered, as Figure 7-31 shows.
7-25
Optical System
Figure 7-31 Scattered scattergram Settlement: Soak with dilute probe cleanser. If it does not work, replace the flow cell assembly.
7.4.3 Dirty flow cell It can be classified into: dirty inner wall and dirty outer surface. Dirty outer surface might due to the pollution from waste, and dirty inner wall is caused by the pollution of blood clot on the inner wall of flow cell. Settlement: Dirty outer surface: wipe the outer surface gently with dustless cloth soaked in alcohol, and in the same direction Dirty inner wall: refer to the cleaning method for the inner wall of liquid flow cell.
7-26
8
Troubleshooting
8.1 Error code and information Table 8-1 Error code and information Error Code
Error Name
Error Code
Error Name
0x01000100
Valve output failed
0x01000701
Driver board FPGA download symbol error
0x01000101
Valve No. out of range
0x01000702
Driver board FPGA download command error
0x01000201
Sampling assembly horizontal
0x01000703
motor failed to move to target
Driver
board
FPGA
load
address out of range
position 0x01000202
Sampling assembly horizontal
0x01000704
motor failed to return to home
Drive
board
single
data
written out of limit
position after initialization 0x01000203
Sampling assembly horizontal
0x01000705
motor failed to leave home
Drive board data write out of limit
position after initialization 0x01000204
Adjusting sampling assembly horizontal
motor
to
0x01000706
Drive board write forbidden
0x01000707
Drive
target
position failed 0x01000205
Adjusting sampling assembly horizontal
motor
to
home
board
FPGA
write
overtime
position failed 0x01000206
Adjusting sampling assembly horizontal
motor
to
0x01000731
leave
Drive board EEPROM write error
home position failed 0x01000207
Sampling assembly horizontal
0x01000801
motor adjustment error 0x01000208
Drive board functional code error
Sampling assembly horizontal
0x01000802
Drive board data length error
0x01000803
Drive board command label
motor adjusting steps out of limit 0x01000209
Sampling assembly horizontal motor adjusting end position
error
error 0x01000211
Sampling assembly vertical
0x01000804
8-1
Drive board check code error
Troubleshooting motor failed to move to target position 0x01000212
Sampling assembly vertical
0x01000805
Drive board end code error
0x01000806
Drive board identity code
motor failed to initialize to upper position 0x01000213
Sampling assembly vertical motor failed to initialize to
error
lower position 0x01000214
Adjusting sampling assembly vertical
motor
to
0x01000807
Sequence pack analysis busy
0x01000808
No complete sequence pack
0x01000809
Sequence pack head frame
target
position failed 0x01000215
Adjusting sampling assembly vertical
motor
to
upper
position failed 0x01000216
Adjusting sampling assembly vertical motor to leave upper
error
position failed 0x01000217
Sampling assembly vertical
0x01000810
motor adjustment error 0x01000218
Sequence pack start analysis number error
Sampling assembly vertical
0x01000811
motor adjusting steps out of
Sequence pack total frames error
limit 0x01000219
Sampling assembly vertical
0x01000812
Sequence pack save error
0x01000813
Sequence pack end frame
motor adjusting end position error 0x01000220
Sampling assembly is working
error 0x01000221
Cannot
adjust
sampling
0x01000814
assembly 0x01000222
error
Sampling assembly horizontal
0x01000815
motor action overtime 0x01000223
Sequence pack frame order error
Sampling assembly horizontal
0x01000816
motor action forbidden 0x01000224
Sequence pack body frame
Sequence
pack
execution
overtime
Sampling assembly horizontal
0x01000817
motor does not match current
None-sequence
pack
analysis error
position 0x01000225
Sampling assembly vertical
0x01002000
Background abnormal
0x01002010
WBC count starts too slow
motor action overtime 0x01000226
Sampling assembly vertical
8-2
Troubleshooting motor action forbidden 0x01000227
Sampling assembly vertical
0x01002011
WBC count time too long
0x01002020
WBC count starts too fast
0x01002021
WBC count time too short
0x01002022
WBC bubbles
0x01002030
RBC count starts slow
WBC
0x01002031
RBC count time too long
Sampling assembly DIFF bath
0x01002040
RBC count starts too fast
0x01002041
RBC count time too short
upper
0x01002042
RBC bubbles
lower
0x01003000
Low vacuum
0x01003001
High vacuum
0x01003010
Low pressure
0x01003011
High pressure
0x01003020
WBC volumetric tube filter
motor
mismatch
current
position 0x01000228
Sampling assembly vertical motor failed to pierce to lower position
0x01000229
Sampling assembly vertical motor failed to pierce to upper position
0x01000230
Sampling assembly horizontal motor photocoupler error
0x01000231
Sampling assembly RBC bath photocoupler error
0x01000232
Sampling
assembly
bath photocoupler error 0x01000233
photocoupler error. 0x01000234
Sample
assembly
vertical
motor photocoupler error 0x01000235
Sampling
assembly
photocoupler error 0x01000236
Sampling
assembly
photocoupler error 0x01000300
Sampling syringe busy
0x01000301
Sampling
syringe
photocoupler abnormal 0x01000302
Sampling syringe failed to return to home position after action
0x01000303
Sampling syringe failed to leave
home
position
after
clog
action 0x01000304
Sampling syringe failed to
0x01003021
return to home position before
RBC volumetric tube filter clog
action 0x01000305
Sampling syringe failed to
0x01003030
leave home position before action
8-3
DIFF reaction bath temp. error
Troubleshooting 0x01000306
Sample
syringe
aspirate
0x01003031
volume over range 0x01000307
Sample
syringe
range dispense
0x01003032
volume over range 0x01000308
Sample
Temperature out of working Temperature out of operating range
syringe
action
0x01003033
Optical system temp. error
0x01000310
Sample injection syringe busy
0x01003050
FS blank voltage abnormal
0x01000311
Sample
0x01003060
HGB blank voltage abnormal
0x01003061
Laser diode current abnormal
0x01003062
HGB channel error
0x01003070
Diluent expired
0x01003071
HGB Lyse expired
0x01003072
LEO(I) Lyse expired
0x01003073
LEO(II) Lyse expired
0x01003074
Cleanser expired
overtime injection
syringe
photocoupler abnormal 0x01000312
Sample failed
injection to
return
syringe to
home
position after action 0x01000313
Sample
injection
syringe
failed to leave home position after action 0x01000314
Sample failed
injection to
return
syringe to
home
position before action 0x01000315
Sample
injection
syringe
failed to leave home position before action 0x01000316
Sample
injection
syringe
aspirate volume over range 0x01000317
Sample
injection
syringe
dispense volume over range 0x01000318
Sample
injection
syringe
action overtime 0x01000320
Sheath fluid syringe busy
0x01003080
No Diluent
0x01000321
Sheath
0x01003081
No LH lyse
0x01003082
No LEO(I) lyse
0x01003083
No LEO(II) lyse
0x01003084
No Cleanser
fluid
syringe
photocoupler abnormal 0x01000322
Sheath fluid syringe failed to return to home position after action
0x01000323
Sheath fluid syringe failed to leave
home
position
after
action 0x01000324
Sheath fluid syringe failed to return to home position before action
8-4
Troubleshooting 0x01000325
Sheath fluid syringe failed to
0x01003085
Waste is full
0x01003090
Emptying WBC bath failed
0x01003091
Emptying RBC bath failed
0x010030A0
Constant current source 55V
leave home position before action 0x01000326
Sheath fluid syringe aspirate volume out of range
0x01000327
Sheath fluid syringe dispense volume out of range
0x01000328
Sheath fluid syringe action overtime
0x01000330
voltage abnormal
Lyse syringe busy
0x010030A1
+12V
analogue
voltage
abnormal 0x01000331
Lyse
syringe
photocoupler
0x010030A2
abnormal 0x01000332
Lyse syringe failed to return to
0x010030A3
Lyse syringe failed to leave
0x010030A4
Drive
board
24V
voltage
Drive
board
12V
voltage
5V
voltage
abnormal
Lyse syringe failed to return to
0x010030A5
home position before action 0x01000335
voltage
abnormal
home position after action 0x01000334
analogue
abnormal
home position after action 0x01000333
-12V
Drive
board
abnormal
Lyse syringe failed to leave
0x010030B0
Data board DDR abnormal
0x010030B1
Data
home position before action 0x01000336
Lyse syringe aspirate volume out of range
0x01000337
board
FLEXBUS
abnormal
Lyse syringe dispense volume
0x010030B2
Data board FLASH abnormal
0x010030B3
Data
out of range 0x01000338
Lyse syringe action overtime
board
AD7908
board
AD7928
abnormal 0x01000340
Diluent syringe busy
0x010030B4
Data abnormal
0x01000341
Diluent syringe photocoupler
0x010030C0
abnormal 0x01000342
Drive board communication error
Diluent syringe failed to return
0x010030D0
Side door open
0x010030D1
Optical assembly cover open
0x010030D2
Sample compartment door
to home position after action 0x01000343
Diluent syringe failed to leave home position after action
0x01000344
Diluent syringe failed to return to home position before action
0x01000345
Diluent syringe failed to leave
open 0x01004200
home position before action
8-5
Software protocol resolution
Troubleshooting 0x01000346
Diluent
syringe
aspirate
0x01004201
Response overtime
dispense
0x01004202
Heartbeat disconnected
action
0x01004401
DIFF data FIFO overflow
Optical system setting out of
0x01004402
DIFF data RAM overflow
0x01004403
WBC data FIFO overflow
volume out of range 0x01000347
Diluent
syringe
volume out of range 0x01000348
Diluent
syringe
overtime 0x01000401
limit 0x01000402
DIFF bath temperature setting out of limit
0x01000601
Setting pressure failed
0x01004404
WBC data RAM overflow
0x01000602
Setting vacuum setting failed
0x01004405
RBC data FIFO overflow
0x01000603
Adjusting pressure chamber
0x01004406
RBC data RAM overflow
0x01004407
PLT data FIFO overflow
pressure failed 0x01000604
Adjusting vacuum chamber vacuum failed
0x01000605
Pressure test failed
0x01004408
PLT data RAM overflow
0x01000606
Vacuum test failed
0x01004409
HGB data FIFO overflow
0x01000607
Pressure chamber pressure
0x0100440a
HGB data RAM overflow
0x01004600
Analyzer
out of control limit 0x01000608
Vacuum chamber vacuum out of control limit
0x01000611
Flow cell clog
communication
disconnected 0x01004601
Analyzer configuration fail
8-6
network
Troubleshooting
8.2 Errors indicated by error messages When operating the analyzer, if error(s) is detected, the corresponding error message will be displayed on the bottom of the screen. In the error message area, the severity levels are discriminated from high to low by background colors, with red for the highest and green for the lowest. Click the error message on the screen and the corresponding help information will pop up. You can click the "Remove error" button as instructed by the help information to remove the error, or, remove some errors as instructed by the troubleshooting procedures of this manual.
8.2.1 Pressure errors Table 8-2 Pressure errors Error Message
Description
Setting pressure failed
The pressure created in
Pressure pump abnormal
the specified time can
Tubing connects the pressure chamber
not
or pressure pump leaks
meet
Possible causes
the
requirement.
Pressure filter leaks Pressure sensor abnormal, immoderate error Related detecting circuit abnormal
Setting vacuum setting
The vacuum created in
Vacuum pump abnormal
failed
the specified time can
Tubing connects the vacuum chamber or
not
vacuum pump leaks
meet
the
requirement.
Vacuum sensor abnormal, immoderate error Related detecting circuit abnormal
8.2.2 Reagent errors Table 8-3 Reagent errors Error Message No Diluent
No LH lyse
Description
Possible causes
Diluent is used up or the
The Diluent is used up.
sensor of the diluent pick up
the sensor of the diluent pick up tube is
tube
connected improperly or damaged and
is
connected
improperly.
needs to be replaced.
LH lyse is used up or
The LH lyse is used up.
excessive bubbles exist in
LH
the LH lyse channel
excessive bubbles. 8-7
lyse
channel
leaks,
leading
to
Troubleshooting No LEO(I) lyse
No LEO(II) lyse
No Cleanser
Waste is full
Diluent expired LEO(I) Lyse Expired LEO(II) Lyse expired LH Lyse expired Cleanser expired
LEO(I) lyse is used up or
The LEO(I) lyse is used up.
excessive bubbles exist in
LEO(I) lyse channel leaks, leading to
the LEO(I) lyse channel
excessive bubbles.
LEO(II) lyse is used up or
The LEO(II) lyse is used up.
excessive bubbles exist in
LEO(II) lyse channel leaks, leading to
the LEO(II) lyse channel
excessive bubbles.
Cleanser is used up or
The cleanser is used up.
excessive bubbles exist in
Cleanser
the Cleanser channel
excessive bubbles.
The waste container is full
Waste container is full.
or the sensor connecting the
The sensor of the waste pick up tube is
waste
connected improperly or damaged and
container
is
channel
leaks,
connected improperly
needs to be replaced.
Diluent expired
Diluent expired
leading
to
Exp. date setting is wrong LEO(I) lyse expired
LEO(I) Lyse expired Exp. date setting is wrong
LEO(II) lyse expired
LEO(II) Lyse expired Exp. date setting is wrong
LH lyse expired
LH Lyse expired Exp. date setting is wrong
Cleanser expired
Cleanser expired Exp. date setting is wrong
8.2.3 Hardware errors Refer to Chapter 5 Hardware System for how to troubleshoot each board.
8.2.4 Measurement errors Table 8-4 Measurement errors Error Message
Description
Background
One
or
abnormal
background
more
Possible causes 1. Bath, sample probe, probe wipe or aperture are contaminated.
results are out of
2. Diluent is expired or contaminated
the
3. Diluent tubing and back bath tubing leak,
range
specified
leading to excessive bubbles 4. Bubbles
or
clog
is
alarmed
during
the
background count. 5. Outside interference caused by poor shielding
8-8
Troubleshooting LAS background
Value is out of the
1. LAS voltage signal is improperly inducted.
voltage abnormal
range of 0-400mv
2. Flow cell is contaminated. 3. Related detecting circuit abnormal
HGB background
HGB background
voltage abnormal
voltage is out of the
range
[3.2,4.9]V
1. No diluent in the WBC/HGB bath; HGB light is not turned on. 2. WBC/HGB bath is contaminated. 3. Reagent is expired or contaminated. 4. Improper HGB gain settings 5. HGB light assembly abnormal 6. Related detecting circuit abnormal
RBC clog
RBC count time
start time.
too long RBC
starts
1. Improper settings for reference count time and
too
2. The bath is contaminated or the aperture is clogged by impurity.
slow
3. The photocoupler of the volumetric tube is damaged. 4. Vacuum abnormal 5. Volumetric-tube-related tubing clogs. 6. Poor connections between the valves and the driver board. RBC bubbles
RBC count time too short
1. Improper settings for reference count time and start time.
RBC starts too fast
2. The photocoupler of the volumetric tube is damaged. 3. Volumetric tube is dirty. 4. Bubbles exist at the tee connector of the volumetric tube. 5. Fluidic error that leads to the failed emptying of the volumetric tube. 6. Vacuum abnormal 7. Poor connections between the valves and the driver board.
WBC clog
WBC count time too long WBC slow
starts
1. Improper settings for reference count time and start time.
too
2. The bath is contaminated or the aperture is clogged by impurity. 3. The photocoupler of the volumetric tube is damaged. 4. Vacuum abnormal 5. Volumetric-tube-related tubing clogs. 8-9
Troubleshooting 6. Poor connections between the valves and the driver board. WBC bubbles
WBC count time
1. Improper settings for reference count time and
too short WBC
start time.
starts
too
2. The photocoupler of the volumetric tube is
fast
damaged. 3. Volumetric tube is dirty. 4. Bubbles exist at the tee connector of the volumetric tube. 5. Fluidic error that leads to the failed emptying of the volumetric tube. 6. Vacuum abnormal 7. Poor connections between the valves and the driver board.
8.2.5 Temperature errors Table 8-5 Temperature errors Error Message
Description
Possible causes
Optical system
Temperature value read
The temperature transducer inner the optical
temp. error
is out of the range of
system error
[30, 40] ℃.
The heater inner the optical system error
Reaction bath abnormal
The bath temperature is out of the reference
or
range
DIFF
reaction
bath temp. error
reaction
bath
of
35℃-37℃.
Please
adjust
the
temperature transducer
temperature to meet the requirement.
error
The temperature transducer of reaction bath is damaged and needs to be replaced.
Ambient
Ambient
temperature
The ambient temperature is out of the working
temperature out
abnormal
or
range
of
temperature transducer
temperature to meet the requirement
error
The ambient temperature transducer is damaged
working
range
ambient
of
15℃-30℃.
Please
adjust
the
and needs to be replaced. Ambient
Ambient
temperature
The ambient temperature is out of the operating
temperature out
abnormal
or
range
of
temperature transducer
temperature to meet the requirement
error
The ambient temperature transducer is damaged
range
operating
ambient
of
10℃-40℃.
and needs to be replaced.
8-10
Please
adjust
the
9
Appendixes
A. Accessories A.1 No.
Spare parts Code/Model
Name
1
0030-10-13064
Linear Stepping Motor 5V 1.8 degree
2
0033-20-74526
Dustproof cover for syringe
3
2000-20-03125
Ruby Red Cell Counter100um RB-22102
4
2100-10-08212
Fan cover. Φ80mm
5
2800-21-28878
Motor position sensor assembly
6
3001-10-07057
Volumetric tube
7
3001-10-07060
Micro-switch OMR0N D2SW-01H
8
3001-10-07252
Rotary diaphragm pump
9
3001-20-07263
Front bath washer (Mould WH02-205)
10
3001-20-18695
Fluorin rubber washer
11
115-002439-00
Filter of isolation chamber
12
3003-20-34955
Isolation chamber clamp
13
3003-21-34925
Motor position sensor assembly
14
3005-20-44746
Probe wipe clamp
15
3100-10-49438
Syringe Assembly100ul
16
3100-10-49442
Cytometer Cell
17
3100-20-41005
Sample probe
18
3101-10-69301
Syringe 250ul
19
3101-10-69302
Magnet OD12mm thickness 5mm
20
3101-20-68312
DIFF bath
21
3101-20-68315
Sample probe presser
22
3101-20-68347
Pressure chamber fixing plate
23
3101-20-68434
Bath insulation plate
24
3101-20-68436
Bath shielding cover
25
3101-20-68438
Circuit support
26
3101-20-68440
Circuit spacer
27
3101-20-68449
Shielding box of the measurement unit
28 29
3101-20-68488 3101-20-68558
Open vial sample probe Pipe clamp of liquid-level board
30
3101-20-68559
Shielding cover of liquid-level board A-1
Appendixes 31 32 33
043-000225-00 3101-20-68603 3101-20-68604
5300vet front cover Jointed parts of the front cover Indicator cover
34
3101-20-68711
Upper cover of the shielding box of data board
35
3101-20-68712
lower cover of the shielding box of data board
36
3102-20-69165
Air pressure chamber
37
M90-000144---
Foil. Copper foil belt, width 25mm, length 16.5m/roll UL certificated
38
M90-100032---
Syringe 2.5ml
A.2 No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
Spare assemblies Code/Model 0033-30-74627 0033-30-74628 0033-30-74615 3100-30-49554 3100-30-49556 3100-30-49557 3100-30-49559 3100-30-49560 3100-30-49561 3100-30-49567 3100-30-49568 3101-30-68320 3101-30-68337 3101-30-68338 3101-30-68339 3101-30-68351 3101-30-68532 3101-30-68538 3101-30-68542 3101-30-68540 3101-30-68541 3101-30-68544 3101-30-68547 3101-30-68548 3101-30-68549 3101-30-68611 3101-30-68651 3101-30-68662 3101-30-68663 3101-30-68664 3101-30-68665 3101-30-68736 115-002661-00
Name 10ml syringe assembly Single syringe drive assembly 10ml syringe Laser assembly Front light assembly Diaphragm lens assembly Rear light assembly Beam splitting assembly Focusing lens assembly Rectifier assembly Flow cell assembly WBC reaction bath assembly Syringe assembly (100ul) Syringe assembly (250ul) Syringe assembly (2.5ml) Waste pump assembly Pressure chamber assembly WBC assembly RBC front/back bath assembly Bath assembly HGB support assembly Power assembly Vacuum chamber assembly Belt-wheel-shaft assembly Sample probe horizontal movement assembly Relieve valve assembly Optical system LAS assembly MAS assembly Low angle PD assembly High angle PD assembly Operating software (for computer) 3104 Operating software CD A-2
Appendixes 34 35 36 37 38 39
115-002538-00 115-002540-00 3101-30-68766 115-002539-00 3101-30-68768 3101-30-68776
A.3
Diluent cap assembly LEO (I) Lyse cap assembly LEO (II) Lyse cap assembly LH Lyse cap assembly Cleanser cap assembly Waste cap assembly
Spare pipes
No.
Code/Model
Name
1
0040-10-32301
Tubing.PTFE,.040""ID+/-.00
2
3001-10-07069
Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon
3
A21-000002---
Tubing.Silicone,1/8"X1/4" X100ft,2800546-100
4
M6G-020006---
Tubing.Silicone,1/16""X3/1
5
M6G-020007---
Tubing OD3mm ID1mm EVA
6
M6G-020009---
Tubing. Silicone 0.031""ID
7
M90-000025---
Tubing.1/8""X1/4"",R-3603
8
M90-000026---
Tubing.PTFE,1/32""X1/16"",
9
M90-100031---
Tubing.Teflon,1.5mmX2.5mm,
A.4 No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
A.5 No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Spare PCBA Code/Model 3101-30-68501 3101-30-68503 3101-30-68505 3101-30-68507 3101-30-68509 3101-30-68511 3101-30-68513 3101-30-68515 3101-30-68517 3101-30-68519
Name Data board Drive board Mother board Liquid-level board Power board Volumetric board Laser control board FS pre-amplification board SS pre-amplification board Indicator board
Spare cables Code/Model 009-000043-00 3100-20-49040 3101-20-68573 3101-20-68574 3101-20-68575 3101-20-68578 3101-20-68581 3101-20-68584
Name Network cable (for connection between the analyzer and the computer) Connecting cable of Micro-switch Connecting line of motor and sensor Connecting cable of reagent sensor Connecting cable of volumetric board Connecting cable of power switch Connecting cable of laser control SS signal line A-3
Appendixes 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
A.6 No.
3101-20-68585 3101-20-68586 3101-20-68589 3101-20-68590 3101-20-68591 3101-20-68592 3101-21-68588 3101-21-68593 3101-30-68431 3102-20-69105
FS signal line Connecting cable of switch control Connecting cable from switch to power board Power box fan and connecting cable Outlet earth wire Connecting cable of pump Connecting cable of AC input Connecting cable of laser Connecting cable of indicator board Connecting cable of DIFF bath
Spare connector Code/Model
Name
1
3001-10-07066
Tee connector T220/230-1
2
3102-20-69219
Waste tube connector
3
M90-100009---
Connector. Female Luer,Lug,Panel,1/4-28UNF,1/8"ID Connector. Lock Nut, Panel Mount,1/4-28UNF,Orange
4
M90-100010---
Nylon
5
M90-100012---
Connector. Lock Nut, Panel Mount,1/4-28UNF,White Nylon
6
M90-100013---
Connector. Lock Nut, Panel Mount,1/4-28UNF,Black Nylon
7
M90-100015---
Lock Nut
8
M90-100016---
Connector. Lock Nut, Panel Mount,1/4-28UNF,Blue Nylon Connector.
Male
Luer
Lock
Ring,
For
MTLP
or
9
M90-100017---
LC23,Orange
10
M90-100019---
Connector. Male Luer Lock Ring, For MTLP or LC23,White
11
M90-100020---
Connector. Male Luer Lock Ring, For MTLP or LC23,Black
12
M90-100021---
Connector. Male Luer Lock Ring, For MTLP or LC23,Red
13
M90-100022---
Connector. Male Luer Lock Ring, For MTLP or LC23,Green
14
M90-100023---
Connector. Male Luer Lock Ring, For MTLP or LC23,Blue
15
M90-100024---
Connector. Male Luer,1/16"Barb,White Nylon,MTL210-1
16
M90-100025---
Connector. Male Luer,1/8"Barb,White Nylon,MTL230-1
17
M90-100028---
Connector.Tee,400Barb,3/32"ID,White Nylon
18
M90-100028-01
Connector. Straight Through,40 0Barb,3/32"ID,White
19
M90-100028-03
Connector.Y,400Barb,3/32"ID,White Nylon
20
M90-100030---
Connector.Y,200Barb,1/8"ID,White Nylon
21
M90-100046---
Connector. Coded Lock Ring, For FTLLB or FTLB, Orange
22
M90-100048---
Connector. Coded Lock Ring, For FTLLB or FTLB, White
23
M90-100049---
Connector. Coded Lock Ring, For FTLLB or FTLB, Black
24
M90-100051---
Connector. Coded Lock Ring, For FTLLB or FTLB, Green
25
M90-100052---
Connector. Coded Lock Ring, For FTLLB or FTLB, Blue
A-4
Appendixes 26
M90-100065---
Connector. Tee Reduction,400Barb,1/8"&3/32"ID,White
27
M90-100069---
Connector.Thread,10-32UNF,1/4"Hex,400Barb,3/32"ID
A.7
Consumable
No.
Name
Code/Model
Package Specifications
1 2 3 4 5 6
V-53LEO(I) Lyse(English/350mL*4) V-53LEO(II) Lyse(English/150mL*4) V-53LH Lyse(English/180mL*4) V-53 CLEANSE(English /850mL*4) V-53D Diluent (English /10L) V-53P Probe Cleanser (English /50mL)
105-000152-00
350mLX4
105-000153-00
150mLX4
105-000154-00
180mLX4
105-000155-00
850mLX4
105-000146-00
10LX1
105-000151-00
50mLX1
A-5
B. List of Wearing Parts
No.
Code/Model
Name
1
3001-10-07054
Air Filter
2
3003-20-34941
Tee valve ASCO458284
3
3003-20-34942
Two-way valve ASCO458283
4
3006-20-74804
Probe Wipe
5
M07-00014S-00
VAL S305 07-Z030H 12VDC
6
M07-00076F---
FUSE Slow-Blow
7
M07-00077F---
FUSE Slow-Blow 125V 5A
8
M07-00079F---
FUSE Slow-Blow 125V 7A
9
M6G-020011---
Tubing.PharMed,1/16""ODX1/
10
0030-30-13197
Mini two-way electromagnetic valve (short line)
11
082-000027-00
Filter assembly
B-1
C. Fluidic diagram
C-1
D. Pump and Valve Function Table D1.
Valve Function Table
No. V01 V02 V03 V04
Function Provides fluid for the sample probe; V01 opens, the waste discharging path of the diluent syringe connects the sample probe. Provides fluid for the probe wipe; V02 opens, the waste discharging path of the diluent syringe connects the inlet of the probe wipe. Aspirating/discharging switch of diluent syringe Cleans the interior of the sample probe; V04 opens, the sample probe connects the sheath fluid syringe.
Two way/Tee 3 3 3 2
V05
Aspirating/discharging switch of LEO (I) lyse
3
V06
Aspirating/discharging switch of LEO (II) lyse
3
V07
Aspirating/discharging switch of LH lyse
3
V08 V09 V10 V11 V12 V13
Provides fluid for RBC bath; V08 opens, the waste discharging path of the diluent syringe connects the fluidic line of RBC bath Opens and closes the pressure chamber and the waste outlet of the DIFF bath; bubbles the DIFF bath Opens and closes the path between the vacuum chamber and the pressure chamber Opens and closes the pressure chamber and the isolation chamber t of the RBC bath; bubbles the RBC bath Opens and closes the pressure chamber and the isolation chamber t of the WBC bath; bubbles the WBC bath Together with V33 and V29 to control the cleaning of the WBC back bath
3 2 2 2 2 2
V14
Together with V34 and V30 to control the cleaning of the RBC back bath
2
V15
Controls the aspiration of the cleanser
3
V21 V22 V23 V24
Opens and closes the sheath fluid syringe and the sample dispenseion syringe; assists the sheath fluid dispensing the sample Opens and closes the sheath fluid syringe and DIFF bath; cleans DIFF bath Aspirating/discharging switch of sheath fluid syringe Opens and closes the sheath fluid syringe and flow cell; dispenses sheath fluid
2 2 3 2
V25
Empties the WBC volumetric tube
2
V26
Empties the RBC volumetric tube
2
D-1
Appendixes V27
Controls the waste discharging of the probe wipe
2
V28
Controls the waste discharging of the flow cell
2
V29
Controls the cleaning of the WBC back bath
3
V30
Controls the cleaning of the RBC back bath
3
V31
Empties the WBC volumetric tube
3
V32
Empties the RBC volumetric tube
3
V33
Controls the WBC counting
2
V34
Controls the RBC counting
2
V35
Controls the draining of the RBC bath
2
V36
Controls the draining of the WBC bath
2
V37
Controls the draining of the vacuum chamber
2
V38
Controls the draining of the DIFF bath
2
V39
Controls the preparation of the DIFF sample
2
D2.
Pump function table
Name
Function Creates pressure in the pressure chamber, which is used to bubble and flash
P1
the aperture Discharges the waste of the DIFF bath; empties and creates vacuum in the
P2
vacuum chamber to drive the counting by impedance method, clean the back bath and drain the volumetric tube. Discharges the waste of the WBC bath, RBC bath and probe wipe
P3
D3.
Syringe function table Name
Diluent syringe Sheath syringe Aspiration
Function Dispenses diluent into the WBC bath and RBC bath; cleans the sample probe and dispenses fluid for the probe wipe Prepares samples; forms sheath fluid; cleans the DIFF bath and the sample preparation tubing Aspirates and dispenses samples
syringe Sample syringe
Dispenses the sample into the flow cell
Lyse-Syringe
Aspirates and dispenses the LEO (I) Lyse, LEO (II) Lyse and LH Lyse
D-2
E. Tubing E1.
Fluidic connection drawing
E-1
Appendixes
E2.
Tubing models
No.
Material code
Description
characteristics Thick
1
M90-100071---
2
3001-10-07069
TYGON Tubing S-50-HL ID3/32' Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon
M90-100031---
TEFLON TUBING ID1.5mm OD2.5mm 9023-14
Thin 50 soft tube 1.5,
thick,
Teflon tube White
5
A21-000002---
Tubing.Silicone,1/8"X1/4"X100ft,2800546-100
soft
tube
ID 4
50
thick
silicon tube Thick transparent
6
M90-000025---
TYGON R-3603 ID1/8' OD1/4' WALL1/16'
soft tube
Tubing.Silicone,3/32"X7/32"X100ft,2800392-10 7
A21-000007---
0
Thick silicon tube Hard transparent
9
M6G-020005---
Hard tube ID=2mm,OD=3.6mm
tube MPF300 Medium silicone
10
M6G-020006---
Tubing.Silicone,1/16"X3/16",TYGON 3350
tube Teflon
11
0040-10-32301
TEFLON TUBING ID 0.04' OD 1/16'
ID=1, OD=1.6 Small
12
M6G-020009---
Tubing. silicone 0.031"ID 0.156"OD 50ft/coil
tube, silicone
tube Thin pinch tube,
14
M6G-020011---
Tubing.PharMed,1/16"ODX1/8"ID
yellow Teflon
tube,
ID=0.7874, 18
M90-000026---
TEFLON .031ID X .062OD P/N,3000074-100
OD=1.6
19
M6G-020007---
Tubing OD3mm ID1mm EVA
EVA Tubing
20
M6G-020034---
Tubing. Silicone, for PS pinch valve 1.6X3.2mm
pinch tube, white
E-2
Appendixes
E3.
Connectors
No. 1
Code J4,J10,J36, J37
Model
Material code
T210/220-1
Description Tee connector
characteristics T Tee connector with the smaller two
sides
and
one larger end 2
J6,J7, J12
Y420-1
M90-100028-0
Connector.
Y Tee Connector
3
Y,400Barb,3/32"
（medium）
ID,White Nylon 3
J15
Y230-1
M90-100030---
Connector.Y,20
Y tee Connector
0Barb,1/8"ID,W
（large）
hite Nylon 4
J9,J30,J31,J32 ,J38,
N420-1
J102,
M90-100028-0
Connector.
I
1
Straight
Connector-mediu
Through,400Bar
m
J107,J112
b,3/32"ID,White 5
J13,J14,J16,
N430/420-1
M90-100027---
J127
Connector.
I
Straight
Connector-large
Through
—medium
Reduction,1/8"& 3/32"ID 6
7
J35
J1,J2,J3,J5,J11
T430/420-1
T420-1
M90-100065---
M90-100028---
Connector. Tee
T Connector with
Reduction,400B
the
arb,1/8"&3/32"I
sides
D
medium end
3/32
PE
TEE
larger
two
and
one
T
,J17,J18,J19,J
FITTING-WHIT
Connector-mediu
20,J21,J22,J24
E NYL T420-1
m
Connector.
L Connector
,J25,J27,J101, J103,J104, J113, J114 8
J100,J105,J10
L430/420-1
M90-100066---
6
Elbow Reduction,400B arb,1/8"&3/32"I D,White
E-3
Appendixes 9
J115,
J120,
Screw
J121
connector
thread
Used
for
connecting
the
thin 50 tube and Teflon (ID=1.5mm) 10
J124,
J125,
Connector
2000-20-03314
J126, J128
E-4
tube
Appendixes
E4. No.
Tubing No.
Length (mm)
Material name
1
9-T1
Tubing. MPF Tube 2mmX3.5mm
610
2
9-T2
Tubing. MPF Tube 2mmX3.5mm
40
3
9-T3
Tubing. MPF Tube 2mmX3.5mm
820
4
9-T4
Tubing. MPF Tube 2mmX3.5mm
25
5
9-T5
Tubing. MPF Tube 2mmX3.5mm
150
6
9-T6
Tubing. MPF Tube 2mmX3.5mm
610
7
9-T7
Tubing. MPF Tube 2mmX3.5mm
800
8
9-T8
Tubing. MPF Tube 2mmX3.5mm
640
9
10-T9
Tubing. Silicone,1/16"X3/16",TYGON 3350
30
10
10-T11
Tubing. Silicone,1/16"X3/16",TYGON 3350
40
11
6-T15
Tubing. TYGON R-3603 ID1/8' OD1/4' WALL1/16'
100
12
4-T16
Tubing. Teflon,1.5mmX2.5mm,9023-14
720
13
4-T17
Tubing. Teflon,1.5mmX2.5mm,9023-14
870
14
4-T18
Tubing. Teflon,1.5mmX2.5mm,9023-14
910
15
4-T19
Tubing. Teflon,1.5mmX2.5mm,9023-14
250
16
9-T20
Tubing. MPF Tube 2mmX3.5mm
70
17
4-T21
Tubing. Teflon,1.5mmX2.5mm,9023-14
260
18
2-T22
Tubing. 1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon
70
19
2-T23
Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon
70
*20
4-T24
Tubing.Teflon,1.5mmX2.5mm,9023-14
1200
21
1-T25
Tubing.3/32"X5/32",S-50-HLAAX02004,Tygon
280
22
9-T30
Tubing. MPF Tube 2mmX3.5mm
25
23
9-T31
Tubing. MPF Tube 2mmX3.5mm
80
24
9-T32
Tubing. MPF Tube 2mmX3.5mm
60
E-5
Appendixes
25
9-T33
Tubing. MPF Tube 2mmX3.5mm
60
26
2-T34
Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon
1110
27
4-T35
Tubing.Teflon,1.5mmX2.5mm,9023-14
240
28
9-T36
Tubing. MPF Tube 2mmX3.5mm
230
29
2-T37
Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon
25
30
2-T38
Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon
1010
31
1-T39
Tubing.3/32"X5/32",S-50-HLAAX02004,Tygon
20
32
2-T40
Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon
250
33
9-T41
Tubing. MPF Tube 2mmX3.5mm
20
34
2-T42
Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon
25
35
2-T43
Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon
1100
36
1-T44
Tubing.3/32"X5/32",S-50-HLAAX02004,Tygon
20
37
2-T45
Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon
630
38
2-T46
Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon
950
39
2-T47
Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon
850
40
1-T48
Tubing.3/32"X5/32",S-50-HLAAX02004,Tygon
140
41
1-T49
Tubing.3/32"X5/32",S-50-HLAAX02004,Tygon
490
42
9-T50
Tubing.MPF Tube 2mmX3.5mm
190
43
2-T51
Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon
610
44
1-T52
Tubing.3/32"X5/32",S-50-HLAAX02004,Tygon
30
45
1-T53
Tubing.3/32"X5/32",S-50-HLAAX02004,Tygon
30
46
9-T58
Tubing.MPF Tube 2mmX3.5mm
200
47
9-T60
Tubing.MPF Tube 2mmX3.5mm
120
*48
9-T62
Tubing.MPF Tube 2mmX3.5mm
40
49
12-T63
Tubing.Silicone 0.031"ID 0.156"OD 50ft/coil
20
*50
18-T64
Tubing.Teflon,0.8mm
350
51
9-T65
Tubing.MPF Tube 2mmX3.5mm
25
E-6
Appendixes
*52
9-T66
Tubing.MPF Tube 2mmX3.5mm
20
53
9-T68
Tubing. MPF Tube 2mmX3.5mm
25
*54
2-T69
Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon
40
*55
9-T70
Tubing. MPF Tube 2mmX3.5mm
40
*56
4-T71
Tubing.Teflon,1.5mmX2.5mm,9023-14
1000
*57
12-T72
Tubing. Silicone 0.031"ID 0.156"OD 50ft/coil
20
58
18-T73
Tubing.Teflon,0.8mm
1030
*59
12-T74
Tubing. Silicone 0.031"ID 0.156"OD 50ft/coil
20
60
11-T75
Tubing.Teflon,1.0mm
430
*61
12-T76
Tubing. Silicone 0.031"ID 0.156"OD 50ft/coil
20
62
2-T77
Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon
30
63
2-T78
Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon
15
*64
4-T79
Tubing.Teflon,1.5mmX2.5mm,9023-14
1000
65
12-T80
Tubing. Silicone 0.031"ID 0.156"OD 50ft/coil
20
*66
4-T81
Tubing.Teflon,1.5mmX2.5mm,9023-14
900
67
19-T84
Sampling Tube, EVA Tubing
1000
68
11-T85
Tubing.Teflon,1.0mm
740
*69
11-T86
Tubing.Teflon,1.0mm
300
*70
11-T87
Tubing.Teflon,1.0mm
500
71
1-T88
Tubing.3/32"X5/32",S-50-HLAAX02004,Tygon
720
72
1-T89
Tubing.3/32"X5/32",S-50-HLAAX02004,Tygon
630
73
10-T90
Tubing.Silicone,1/16"X3/16",TYGON 3350
20
74
2-T92
Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon
20
75
9-T93
Tubing. MPF Tube 2mmX3.5mm
125
76
9-T94
Tubing. MPF Tube 2mmX3.5mm
125
77
2-T95
Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon
260
*78
2-T96
Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon
260
E-7
Appendixes
79
5-T97
Tubing. SILCON 2800546-100 ID=0.125'OD=0.250'
22
80
5-T98
Tubing. SILCON 2800546-100 ID=0.125'OD=0.250'
22
81
2-T99
Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon
15
82
2-T100
Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon
15
83
1-T101
Tubing.3/32"X5/32",S-50-HLAAX02004,Tygon
15
84
1-T102
Tubing.3/32"X5/32",S-50-HLAAX02005,Tygon
15
85
1-T103
Tubing.3/32"X5/32",S-50-HLAAX02006,Tygon
15
86
1-T104
Tubing.3/32"X5/32",S-50-HLAAX02007,Tygon
15
87
2-T105
Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon
20
88
9-T107
Tubing. MPF Tube 2mmX3.5mm
70
89
6-T108
Tubing. TYGON R-3603 ID1/8' OD1/4' WALL1/16'
20
90
9-T109
Tubing. MPF Tube 2mmX3.5mm
70
91
6-T110
Tubing. TYGON R-3603 ID1/8' OD1/4' WALL1/16'
20
92
1-T111
Tubing.3/32"X5/32",S-50-HLAAX02004,Tygon
170
93
2-T112
Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon
110
94
2-T113
Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon
110
*95
2-T114
Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon
150
*96
2-T115
Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon
150
97
1-T116
Tubing.3/32"X5/32",S-50-HLAAX02004,Tygon
180
98
1-T117
Tubing.3/32"X5/32",S-50-HLAAX02004,Tygon
15
*99
2-T118
Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon
610
*100
2-T119
Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon
390
101
1-T120
Tubing.3/32"X5/32",S-50-HLAAX02004,Tygon
100
102
1-T121
Tubing.3/32"X5/32",S-50-HLAAX02004,Tygon
200
103
1-T122
Tubing.3/32"X5/32",S-50-HLAAX02004,Tygon
25
104
1-T123
Tubing.3/32"X5/32",S-50-HLAAX02004,Tygon
60
105
1-T124
Tubing.3/32"X5/32",S-50-HLAAX02004,Tygon
25
E-8
Appendixes
106
1-T125
Tubing.3/32"X5/32",S-50-HLAAX02004,Tygon
40
107
1-T126
Tubing.3/32"X5/32",S-50-HLAAX02004,Tygon
25
108
4-T127
Tubing.Teflon,1.5mmX2.5mm,9023-14
50
109
1-T128
Tubing.3/32"X5/32",S-50-HLAAX02004,Tygon
60
110
6-T129
Tubing. TYGON R-3603 ID1/8' OD1/4' WALL1/16'
110
111
6-T130
Tubing. TYGON R-3603 ID1/8' OD1/4' WALL1/16'
180
112
6-T131
Tubing. TYGON R-3603 ID1/8' OD1/4' WALL1/16'
100
113
6-T132
Tubing. TYGON R-3603 ID1/8' OD1/4' WALL1/16'
40
114
6-T133
Tubing. TYGON R-3603 ID1/8' OD1/4' WALL1/16'
40
115
6-T134
Tubing. TYGON R-3603 ID1/8' OD1/4' WALL1/16'
70
116
12-T135
Tubing.Silicone 0.031"ID 0.156"OD 50ft/coil
20
117
12-T136
20
118
20-T139
Tubing.Silicone 0.031"ID 0.156"OD 50ft/coil Tubing.Silicone, for PS pinch valve 1.6X3.2mm, Pinch Tube M6G-020034
*119
11-T140
Tubing.Teflon,1.0mm
80
*120
12-T141
Tubing.Silicone 0.031"ID 0.156"OD 50ft/coil
20
121
12-T142
Tubing.Silicone 0.031"ID 0.156"OD 51ft/coil
20
122
11-T145
Tubing.Teflon,1.0mm
15
123
11-T146
Tubing.Teflon,1.0mm
80
124
2-T147
Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon
20
~125
2-T148
Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon
450
126
2-T149
Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon
420
~127
6-T150
Tubing. TYGON R-3603 ID1/8' OD1/4' WALL1/16'
110
~128
1-T121
Tubing.3/32"X5/32",S-50-HLAAX02004,Tygon
200
129
12-T151
Tubing.Silicone 0.031"ID 0.156"OD 50ft/coil
20
130
12-T152
Tubing.Silicone 0.031"ID 0.156"OD 50ft/coil
20
131
1-T153
Tubing.3/32"X5/32",S-50-HLAAX02004,Tygon
60
132
7-T154
Tubing.Silicone,3/32"X7/32"X100ft,2800392-100
80
E-9
40
Appendixes
~133
2-T155
Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon
60
~134
2-T156
Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon
60
135
12-T157
Tubing.Silicone 0.031"ID 0.156"OD 50ft/coil
20
136
2-T161
Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon
20
137
14-T164
Pinch Tube，Tubing.PharMed,1/16"ODX1/8"ID
70
138
4-T167
Tubing.Teflon,1.5mmX2.5mm,9023-14
220
139
2-T168
Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon
20
140
2-T169
Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon
20
141
12-T170
Tubing.Silicone 0.031"ID 0.156"OD 50ft/coil
20
142
11-T171
Tubing.Teflon,1.0mm
240
143
12-T173
Tubing.Silicone 0.031"ID 0.156"OD 50ft/coil
20
144
11-T174
Tubing.Teflon,1.0mm
170
145
10-T175
Tubing.Silicone,1/16"X3/16",TYGON 3350
20
146
11-T177
Tubing.Teflon,1.0mm
120
147
12-T178
Tubing.Silicone 0.031"ID 0.156"OD 50ft/coil
20
148
11-T180
Tubing.Teflon,1.0mm
100
149
12-T181
Tubing.Silicone 0.031"ID 0.156"OD 50ft/coil
20
150
12-T182
Tubing.Silicone 0.031"ID 0.156"OD 50ft/coil
20
151
12-T183
Tubing.Silicone 0.031"ID 0.156"OD 50ft/coil
20
152
12-T184
Tubing.Silicone 0.031"ID 0.156"OD 50ft/coil
20
153
12-T185
Tubing.Silicone 0.031"ID 0.156"OD 50ft/coil
20
154
10-T186
Tubing.Silicone,1/16"X3/16",TYGON 3350
20
155
10-T187
Tubing.Silicone,1/16"X3/16",TYGON 3350
20
156
1-T188
Tubing.3/32"X5/32",S-50-HLAAX02004,Tygon
250
157
10-T189
Tubing.Silicone,1/16"X3/16",TYGON 3350
20
158
10-T190
Tubing.Silicone,1/16"X3/16",TYGON 3350
20
159
4-T191
Tubing.Teflon,1.5mmX2.5mm,9023-14
55
E-10
Appendixes
160
2-T192
Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon
20
161
2-T193
Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon
20
162
2-T194
Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon
20
163
2-T195
Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon
15
164
9-T196
Tubing.MPF Tube 2mmX3.5mm
40
165
2-T197
Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon
15
166
2-T198
Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon
15
167
1-T199
Tubing.3/32"X5/32",S-50-HLAAX02004,Tygon
15
168
1-T206
Tubing.3/32"X5/32",S-50-HLAAX02004,Tygon
22
169
4-T207
Tubing.Teflon,1.5mmX2.5mm,9023-14
160
170
1-T208
Tubing.3/32"X5/32",S-50-HLAAX02004,Tygon
28
171
1-T209
Tubing.3/32"X5/32",S-50-HLAAX02004,Tygon
70
172
4-T210
Tubing.Teflon,1.5mmX2.5mm,9023-14
130
173
1-T211
Tubing.3/32"X5/32",S-50-HLAAX02004,Tygon
40
174
5-T212
Tubing.Silicone,1/16"X3/16",TYGON 3350
40
175
2-T213
Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon
25
176
2-T214
Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon
25
177
2-T215
Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon
850
178
2-T216
Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon
850
179
2-T217
Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon
850
180
2-T218
Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon
850
181
6-T219
Tubing. TYGON R-3603 ID1/8' OD1/4' WALL1/16'
1500
182
6-T220
Tubing. TYGON R-3603 ID1/8' OD1/4' WALL1/16'
1500
183
5-T221
Tubing.Silicone,1/8"X1/4"X100ft,2800546-100
180
184
5-T222
Tubing.Silicone,1/8"X1/4"X100ft,2800546-100
180
185
5-T223
Tubing.Silicone,1/8"X1/4"X100ft,2800546-100
180
186
5-T224
Tubing.Silicone,1/8"X1/4"X100ft,2800546-100
180
E-11
Appendixes
187
6-T225
Tubing. TYGON R-3603 ID1/8' OD1/4' WALL1/16'
270
188
11-T226
Tubing.Teflon,1mm
500
189
12-T227
Tubing.Silicone 0.031"ID 0.156"OD 50ft/coil
20
190
11-T228
Tubing.Teflon,1mm
60
191
12-T229
Tubing.Silicone 0.031"ID 0.156"OD 50ft/coil
20
192
1-T230
Tubing.3/32"X5/32",S-50-HLAAX02004,Tygon
280
193
1-T231
Tubing.3/32"X5/32",S-50-HLAAX02004,Tygon
480
194
2-T232
Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon
40
195
2-T233
Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon
40
196
2-T234
Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon
20
197
4-T235
Tubing.Teflon,1.5mmX2.5mm,9023-14
80
198
2-T236
Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon
50
199
2-T237
Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon
25
200
2-T238
Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon
20
201
4-T239
Tubing.Teflon,1.5mmX2.5mm,9023-14
110
202
2-T240
Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon
50
203
2-T241
Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon
25
204
2-T242
Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon
25
205
2-T243
Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon
20
206
2-T244
Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon
20
207
4-T245
Tubing.Teflon,1.5mmX2.5mm,9023-14
90
208
2-T246
Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon
50
209
2-T247
Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon
25
210
2-T248
Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon
25
211
2-T249
Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon
20
212
12-T250
Tubing.Silicone 0.031"ID 0.156"OD 50ft/coil
20
213
12-T251
Tubing.Silicone 0.031"ID 0.156"OD 50ft/coil
20
E-12
Appendixes
214
10-T252
Tubing.Silicone,1/16"X3/16",TYGON 3350
6
215
10-T253
Tubing.Silicone,1/16"X3/16",TYGON 3350
6
E-13
F. Error Module and the Classified Errors Technical field
No.
Error module
Mechanism
Sample 1
probe assembly
Error code 1.1
sample probe corroded
1.2
Probe wipe leaks
1.3
Motor error
1.4
Photocoupler error
1.5
Sample probe Initialization error
1.6
Probe wipe leaks
1.7
Tube jammed (Tank chain damaged)
1.8 1.9
2
Syringe assembly
syringe assembly
Relieve
tight) Sample probe assembly abnormal sound (belt is too loose) Motor error
2.2
Photocoupler error
2.3
Too noisy during action
2.4
Frequent motor error reported with normal self-test result
2.5
Syringe leaks
2.6
Syringe initialization error reported
2.7
Syringe broken
3.1
Motor error
3.2
Photocoupler error
3.3
Too noisy during action
3.4
Frequent motor error reported with normal self-test result
3.5
Syringe leaks
3.6
12.5ml syringe initialization error reported
3.7 4
Sample probe assembly abnormal sound (belt is too
2.1
12.5ml 3
Classified errors
4.1
Lead screws gap is too wide, which leads to incorrect metering Flow cell error is reported erroneously
F-1
Appendixes valve
4.2
Relieve valve can not work
4.3
Leakage
4.4
Photocoupler error
4.5
Spring rusty
Diluent
5.1
Too much reagent remained
assembly
5.2
No diluent is reported erroneously
6.1
Waste full is reported erroneously
7.1
Front cover broken
7.2
Side door can not be closed firmly
7.3
Right side door open is reported erroneously
7.4
Aspirate key is damaged and can not work
mechanis
7.5
Metal tube passing fluid is rusty
m
7.6
Printing is easily wiped off
7.7
Heat insulator of the DIFF bath is broken off
assembly
5
6
Waste assembly
Other
7
compone nts damaged
7.8
Pressure/vacuum
abnormal
is
reported
(pressure/vacuum chamber leaks) The gaps between the side door and the front
7.9
cover/the side door and the top cover are too wide.(the magnet on the front cover can not attract the side door firmly)
Hardware
8
Wiring
9
Indicator
8.1
Valves and pumps can not work
9.1
Indicator doesn't work
9.2
Buzzer doesn’t sound when error occurs
10.1
Syringe doesn’t work
10.2
10
11
Drive board
Volumetri
Ambient
temperature
abnormal
is
erroneously
10.3
Motor error is reported
10.4
Valves do not work
10.5
Pumps do not work
10.6
Pressure abnormal is reported
10.7
Valves and pumps keep working and hot
11.2
Count time too long is reported
F-2
reported
Appendixes c board
12
13
14
11.3
Count time too long is reported
12.1
Abnormal background, too high
12.2
Can not start up the analyzer
Data
12.3
Analyzer crashes down frequently
board
12.4
No HGB report; HGB blank voltage too low
12.5
Analysis results are displayed in *
12.6
Can not start up the analyzer normally
13.7
Power-fail, can not start up the analyzer normally
Liquid-lev
14.8
No reagent is reported when there is sufficient.
el board
14.9
No error is reported when there is no reagent
pre-ampli
15.1
No scattergram; no WBC differential
15.2
Scattergram is compressed horizontally
16.1
No scattergram; no WBC differential
16.2
Scattergram is compressed vertically
17.1
Scattergram is compressed horizontally and vertically
17.2
No scattergram
18.1
Analyzer can not start up after switching on
Power board
fication 15
board (high-ang el) pre-ampli fication
16
board (low-ang el) Laser
17
control board
Other 18
hardware
Analyzer can not run samples after pressing the aspirate key
compone
18.3
Temperature abnormal is reported
nts
18.4
Temperature switch is damaged
18.5
No diluent or waste full is reported erroneously
19.1
Valve leaks
19.2
Valve response time too long
19.3
Valve flow small
19.4
Valve does not work
Fluidics Two-way 19
18.2
ASCO valve
F-3
Appendixes 20.1
Valve leaks
20.2
Valve response time too long
20.3
Valve flow small
20.4
Valve does not work
21.1
Pinch valve can not pinch firmly
21.2
Pinch valve doesn’t work
Fluidic
22.1
Discharge volume small
pumps
22.2
Pumps do not work
Air
23.1
Creating pressure time too long
pumps
23.2
Pumps do not work
Air Filter
24.1
Pressure abnormal
25.1
Liquid in the DIFF bath spills
26.1
Tubing broken off or leaks
26.2
Part of the tubing is not well cleaned
26.3
Bended and clogged tubing
26.4
Flow cell clog
Tee 20
ASCO valve
21
22
23 24 25
Pinch valve
Check valve
26.5 26
27
Software
28
Fluidic System
Bath assembly
Software
Liquid hangs on the interior wall of the dispensing tube
26.6
Sample probe is not well cleaned
26.7
Liquid hangs on the tip of the sample probe
26.8
DIFF bath is not well cleaned
26.9
Flow cell interior wall is dirty
26.10
Flow cell waste outlet overflows
26.11
Filter clogs
27.1
Abnormal background; cleaning is not well done
27.2
Instable HGB blank voltage
27.3
WBC clog
28.1
Control unit is busy and can not respond the current command
28.2
System crashes down
28.3
Cooperation F-4
problem
between
hardware
and
Appendixes software 28.4
Data changed or lost
28.5
Print format failed to meet the requirement
28.6
Can not enter the system after starting up
28.7
Software operation is slow
28.8
Management software error
Optical Optical
29
system
29.1
assembly
Standard scattergram and normal patient samples abnormal (except flow cell dirty) Replacing the component when the error can hardly
Others
30
be identified, but the replaced component can work
Others 30.1
normally.
F-5
G. Maintenance Module and the Corresponding Settings No.
Type
Settings to be reset Re-adjust the position of the sampling assembly
Replace the drive board
1 2
Maintenance
Boards
by software Re-adjust the gains, calibration factors and
Replace the data board
count-related settings
Replace the power board
3 4
Re-conduct the safety test
Replace the volumetric board
Reset the count time and the start signal delay 1. Re-adjust the position of the sampling
Disassemble and assemble the
assembly to the DIFF bath.
DIFF bath assembly or have it
2. If the temperature and the mixing are greatly
upgraded
changed, then re-adjusting the optical gain is
5
necessary. Remove the DIFF bath assembly from
6
the
analyzer
and
then
re-assemble it Mechanism
to the DIFF bath by software
Replace
and
disassemble/assemble the front cover
7
Re-adjust the position of the sampling assembly 1. Manually adjust the horizontal position of the mix assembly. 2. Re-adjust the position of the clipper by software. 1. Manually adjust the horizontal position of the
Replace
and
sample feeding assembly.
disassemble/assemble
the
2. Re-adjust the position of the sampling assembly to the sample compartment and the
bottom cover 8
autoloading position by software.
9 10
1. Re-adjust the gains and the calibration factors.
Replace the aperture
2. Reset the count time and the start signal delay. 1. Re-adjust the gains and the calibration factors.
Replace the bath
2. Reset the count time and the start signal delay.
Baths
1. Re-enter the volume of the volumetric tube at Replace the volumetric tube
the setting screen.
11
2. Reset the count time and the start signal delay.
12 13
Replace HGB Sequence
The
vacuum
Re-adjust the gain and calibration of HGB. created
in
the
sequence is changed
Reset the count time and the start signal delay
G-1
Appendixes Sample 14
results
are
changed
greatly
Re-adjust the gain and the calibration.
G-2
H. Method to identify cross network cable and direct-connected network cable H.1
Identify cross network cable
1. With the metal contactors’ side up, mark the 8 lines in the connector from left to right with 1-8. Accordingly, the colors of the lines are: white and orange, orange, white and green, blue, white and blue, green, white and brown, and brown.
Connector of the network cable 2. Define one end of the cable to be A randomly. Then, the other end is B. way to connect the end A and B is shown in the Figure below.
End A and End B End A：white and green, green, white and orange, blue, white and blue, orange, white and brown, and brown （ 1 and 3 is exchanged; 2 and 6 is exchanged） End B：white and orange, orange, white and green, blue, white and blue, green, white and brown, and brown
H.2
Identify direct-connected network cable
1. With the metal contactors’ side up, mark the 8 lines in the connector from left to right with 1-8. Accordingly, the colors of the lines are: white and orange, orange, white and green, blue, white and blue, green, white and brown, and brown.
H-1
Appendixes
Connector of the direct-connected network cable 2. Define one end of the cable to be A randomly. Then, the other end is B. way to connect the end A and B is shown in the Figure below.
End A and End B of the direct-connected network cable End A：white and orange, orange, white and green, blue, white and blue, green, white and brown, and brown End B：white and orange, orange, white and green, blue, white and blue, green, white and brown, and brown
H-2
P/N: 046-000367-00 (3.0)
